Owner's Manual for Mercedes-Benz models including: CLA 2021 Vehicle

en GB

Your owner’s manual can provide answers when you most need them. Find a free download of your Mercedes-Benz CLA 2021 Coupé (118) MBUX Owner’s Manual PDF here.

mercedes, benz, owners, manual, download, pdf

Mercedes-Benz AG

Mercedes-Benz CLA 2021 Coupé MBUX Owner's Manual PDF Download

Mercedes-benz.co.uk

PDF Mercedes-Benz CLA 2021 Coupé MBUX Owner's Manual PDF Download

1Steering wheel gearshi paddles →179 2Combination switch → 132 3Instrument display → 272 4DIRECT SELECT lever → 177 5üStart/stop button → 160


File Info : application/pdf, 525 Pages, 9.17MB

PDF preview unavailable. Download the PDF instead.

mercedes-cla-2021-coupe-118-mbux-owners-manual-1640173907
DDiissccllaaiimmeerr ADlalslafonlggueangde vPeDrFs-iDonoskuomf ethnet ffüorlldoiwesinesg FPaDhFrzdeoucgummodeenltl fboerztiehhist sviechhicinleamlleondel TrSehpleraatfceohlsvloelwresilinoygnteovnevrnesuhiroicnalueofsfditniheteeFnaOdhwrezndeeufrog`sre,sMdaailenufoüanrl tddheeenscGdreiburmtessacnhaelmlnmaMrokaderektltsab,nesdsetwriimehsimcahtnd scsiponerdrceuisanpldeodqniuedidptoemnGedenertumotsafcnyhoreeungrVuvolearhsticcohlnreis.f.tCeonuennttrsyp-rsepcehcenif.icBiltatnegwueangdeevnaSriieatsiiocnhsaanre pIhoresnsiabuleto. rPislieeartseennMoeterctehdaets-yBoeunrzvSeehrivcicleesmtüitgzhptunnkott, bume eeqinugipepderudckwteitshEaxlelmthpelar dPfüelresacnsredibeceroednFftauahncrctzteyiuognumsr .aoTduhetihlsleoarulisnoeddaFfaMfheerczrtecsuegdsmaefsoe-dtByee-llnrjaezhleSrevearznvuitceseryhCsatelteenmntr.seatnodofbutnacintions. PalperaisnetecdonvetarscitoynofuorraoutthheorrviseehdicMleemrcoeddeelss-Banednzvdeheiaclleersmhoipdeiflyyoeuarws.oTuhldisliPkDeF tdDooiecrseuecmsePeivDneFt-aiDspotkrhiunemtleeadntetOstwevnlleterdrs`iiseoMank.atPunoeulsalesliVbfoelerrsoviotanhreidaratvri.oeMnhsöicgtloleicyhmoeouAdrbevwlesehiacicnhludenvmgeeahnyizcnuleot mbIheroetdmaeklkeyonenaiknrrtesot.eancFcaohurnzetuagskMönenrcteendneisc-hBtebnezrüccoknssicthatnigttlyseuipnd, daateMs etrhceeidrevse-hBiecnlzes to tsheeinsetaFatehrozfetuhgeeasrttänandidgidnetrmodnuecueesstcehnaSntgaensdindedreTseigcnhnainkdanepqausipstm, seonwt.iePlease TtÄhhnedereeorfunonlrigeneennoOintweFntoherarm`tstuMhnidasnAPuuDasFlstidsaotttchuuenmgcevunorrtrneiinmtnmaotn.wdBavityaterliedbpevlaeccrhestsieontnhS.eIietpirdsianphteords,sdviabesrlesiothnat dwdieehvsicieahstiPwoDnaFs-DadfeofkleiuvcmetirenengdtywinoiukthreisnypeoemucriFfvaiecllhvdiecahlseigc. eledrcuocukltde Enxoetmbpelatrakeersnetinztt,odaasccmoiut nt adsemMFearcherzdeeusg-Bauesngzeclioefnesrttawnutlrydea.dapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner`s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner`s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz
Before you rst drive o , read this operator's manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this operator's manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:
R Model
R Order
R National version
R Availability
Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The illustrations in this operator's manual show a le -hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of car parts and control elements di ers accordingly.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features
The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital operator's manual R Printed operator's manual R Service booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements R Supplementary documents
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

1185845606Z102
1185845606Z102

2 Contents

Symbols .......................................................... 5
At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) ................................. 10 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 12 Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) ........................................................ 14 Overhead control panel ................................. 16 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 18 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 20
Digital Owner's Manual ................................. 22 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 22
General notes ............................................... 24 Protection of the environment ....................... 24 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 24 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 25 Owner's Manual ............................................ 26 Mercedes me App ......................................... 26 Operating safety ............................................ 27

Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in di erent countries .......................... 29 Diagnostics connection ................................. 38 Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 39 Vehicle registration ....................................... 40 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 40 Information on the REACH regulation ............. 40 Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. 40 Implied warranty ........................................... 41 QR code for rescue card ............................... 41 Data storage ................................................. 42 Copyright ...................................................... 45
Occupant safety ............................................ 46 Restraint system ........................................... 46 Seat belts ..................................................... 48 Airbags ......................................................... 53 PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ 60 Automatic measures a er an accident ........... 61 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 61 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 81

Opening and closing ...................................... 82 Key ............................................................... 82 Doors ............................................................ 85 Boot .............................................................. 90 Side windows ................................................ 94 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 97 Anti-the protection .................................... 101
Seats and stowing ....................................... 104 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 104 Seats .......................................................... 105 Steering wheel ............................................ 114 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 115 Memory function ......................................... 116 Stowage areas ............................................ 118 Sockets ....................................................... 125 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 126 Fitting/removing the oor mats ................... 129
Light and sight ............................................ 130 Exterior lighting ........................................... 130 Interior lighting ............................................ 138

Contents 3

Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen headlamps) ......................................... 139 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 141 Mirrors ........................................................ 144
Climate control ........................................... 147 Overview of climate control systems ............ 147 Operating the climate control system .......... 148
Driving and parking ..................................... 156 Driving ........................................................ 156 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 172 Manual transmission ................................... 175 Automatic transmission ............................... 177 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 181 Refuelling .................................................... 182 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ 188 Parking ....................................................... 205 Driving and driving safety systems ............... 213 Trailer hitch ................................................. 264 Bicycle rack function ................................... 268 Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 270

Instrument display and on-board computer ........................................................... 271 Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... 271 Overview of instrument display .................... 272 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... 273 Operating the on-board computer ................ 273 Function of the power meter (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ 275 Function of the electric motor power availability display (plug-in hybrid) ................ 275 Displaying the power meter (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ 276 Overview of displays in the instrument display ........................................................ 276 Head-up display .......................................... 276
MBUX multimedia system ............................ 279 Overview and operation ............................... 279 System settings .......................................... 288 Plug-in hybrid settings ................................. 292 Navigation ................................................... 293 Telephone ................................................... 302 Mercedes me app ....................................... 305

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 314 Radio & media ............................................. 321 Sound settings ............................................ 326
Maintenance and care ................................. 327 ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 327 Engine compartment ................................... 328 Cleaning and care ....................................... 334
Breakdown assistance ................................. 343 Emergency .................................................. 343 Flat tyre ...................................................... 345 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 350 Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 356 Electrical fuses ............................................ 362
Wheels and tyres ......................................... 365 Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... 365 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... 365 Notes on snow chains ................................. 365 Tyre pressure .............................................. 366

4 Contents
Wheel change ............................................. 370 Emergency spare wheel ............................... 380
Technical data ............................................. 383 Notes on technical data .............................. 383 On-board electronics ................................... 383 Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 385 Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. 386 Operating uids ........................................... 387 Vehicle data ................................................ 397 Trailer hitch ................................................. 399
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 402 Display messages ........................................ 402 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 469
Index .......................................................... 485

In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following symbols:
& WARNING Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

#

Instruction

(/ page) Further information on a topic

Display Display eld in the Instrument Display/media display

4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system

5

Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system

*

Indicates a cause

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

Symbols 5

6 At a glance ­ Cockpit Le -hand-drive vehicles

1 Steering wheel gearshi paddles 2 Combination switch 3 Instrument display 4 DIRECT SELECT lever 5 ü Start/stop button
è ECO start/stop function 6 Media display 7 Climate control systems 8 £ Hazard warning light system 9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps A Glove compartment B Stowage compartment C Cup holder D 8 Controller for volume and switching
sound on/o Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o

At a glance ­ Cockpit 7



179 E z Calls up navigation



281



132 F | Calls up radio or media



281



272 G % Calls up the telephone



281



177 H ß Calls up favourites



281



160 I y Calls up vehicle functions



281



167 J c Active Parking Assist



260



279 K DYNAMIC SELECT switch



173



148 L Touchpad



281



133 M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 

273



57 N Adjusts the steering wheel



114



120 O ý Switches the steering wheel heater



120

on/o



115

P Control panel:



279



279

On-board computer Cruise control or variable limiter I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC



273



224



228

Q Diagnostics connection



38

8 At a glance ­ Cockpit
R Opens the bonnet S ! Electric parking brake T Light switch



329



209



130

10 At a glance ­ Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) Le -hand-drive vehicles

1 Instrument display: õ Operational readiness Power availability display Power meter Trip computer ECO Assist
2 Media display: Plug-in hybrid settings Energy ow display

At a glance ­ Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) 11

3 & Switches immediate pre-entry climate



152



271

control on/o



275

4 A Sets pre-entry climate control for departure time



151



275 5 DYNAMIC SELECT switch



172



271 6 \ Calls up the EQ menu



170 7 q Reduces recuperation



292



169

8 ± Increases recuperation



292 9 6 Depressurises the fuel tank



293



169



182

12 At a glance ­ Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Instrument display (standard)

1 ! ABS 2 #! Turn signal lights 3 h Tyre pressure monitoring system 4 # Electrical fault 5 L Distance warning 6 J Brakes (yellow) 7 J Brakes (red) 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 9 ! Electric parking brake (red) A % Diesel engine: preglow B ; Engine diagnostics C R Rear fog light

At a glance ­ Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 13



481 D K High beam



132

L Low beam



483

T Standing lights



474 E å ESP® OFF



480

÷ ESP®



478 F 6 Restraint system



478 G Fuel level



478 H æ Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location



478

indicator

I Ù Power steering



474 J ü Seat belt



131 K ï Trailer hitch



132



130



130



481



481



470



272



474



473



470



473

14 At a glance ­ Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) Widescreen cockpit instrument display

1 #! Turn signal lights 2 ï Trailer hitch 3 6 Restraint system 4 å ESP® OFF
÷ ESP® 5 R Rear fog light 6 K High beam
L Low beam T Standing lights 7 ÿ Coolant temperature 8 Coolant temperature display 9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) A J Brakes (yellow) B # Electrical fault

At a glance ­ Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) 15



132 C L Distance warning



473 D ! ABS



470 E Ù Power steering



481 F h Tyre pressure monitoring system



481 G % Diesel engine: preglow



131 H æ Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location



132

indicator



I Fuel level 130



J ! Electric parking brake (red) 130



K ü Seat belt 474



L J Brakes (red) 272



M ; Engine diagnostics 478



N ä Indicator lamp inoperative 478



474



480



481



473



483



474



272



478



470



478



474

16 At a glance ­ Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors

2 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp



on/o

3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con-



trol on/o

4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o



5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o



6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp



on/o

At a glance ­ Overhead control panel 17

7 ; me button



305

138 8 G SOS button



305

9 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- 

97

138

roof

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 138 A Inside rearview mirror 138



97



145

138

18 At a glance ­ Door operating unit and seat adjustment

1 V Operates the memory function



2 Adjusts the seats electrically



3 w Switches the seat heating on/o



4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o



5 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle



6 Opens the door



7 p Opens the boot lid



8 Í Operates the outside mirrors



9 W Opens/closes the right side window



A W Opens/closes the rear right side window 

B S Child safety lock for the rear side win-



dows

At a glance ­ Door operating unit and seat adjustment 19

117 C W Opens/closes the rear le side window



94

110 D W Opens/closes the le side window 113 E Adjusts the head restraints 113 F Con gures the seat settings
86 G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 86 H Adjusts the seat height 90 I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 144 J Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position 94 K Adjusts the seat cushion length



94



110



112



107



107



107



107



107

94

81

20 At a glance ­ Emergencies and breakdowns

At a glance ­ Emergencies and breakdowns 21

1 Safety vests



343 A B-pillar with:

2 Fire extinguisher



344

QR code for accessing the rescue card

3 ; me button



305 B Tow-starting or towing away

G SOS button



305 C TIREFIT kit

4 £ Hazard warning light system



133 D First-aid kit (so sided)

5 Stowage compartment for customer literature

E Fuel ller ap with:

6 Starting assistance



354

information label on fuel type

7 To check and top up operating uids



387

information label on tyre pressure

8 Tow-starting or towing away



358

QR code for accessing the rescue card

9 Flat tyre



345 F Warning triangle



41



358



347



344



182



367



41



343

22 Digital Owner's Manual
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5 Õ

R Tips: nd information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display.
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:
Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
R Search: search for keywords in order to nd quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle.

1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster

LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice control system
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Digital Owner's Manual 23

24 General notes
Protection of the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
# Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
# Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
# Switch o the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
# Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

Plug-in hybrid
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. # Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries
at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-ofLife Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components
MercedesBenz AG o ers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts. # Recycled reconditioned components and
parts from MercedesBenz AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating e ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:
R Doors
R Door pillars
R Door sills
R Seats
R Cockpit
R Instrument cluster
R Centre console
R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have accessory parts retro tted at a quali ed specialist workshop.

General notes 25
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been o cially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are only o cially approved for installation or modi cation if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

26 General notes
This is the case in the following situations: R The vehicle type is di erent from that for
which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R Other road users could be endangered. R The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.
Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 386) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special
equipment available at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries.

R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date.
Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.
Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Mercedes me App Notes about the on-demand feature
You can also activate various functions (ondemand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me a er purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me
Requirements: R The vehicle has GPS reception. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
Ordering and activating on-demand feature # Add the desired on-demand feature for the
vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store. # Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er about 2 minutes, unlock the vehicle and
switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a noti cation also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions or system failure
In order to avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the speci ed service/main-
tenance work as well as any necessary repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modi cations to electronic components
Modi cations to electronic components, their so ware or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.
# You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their so ware.
# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

General notes 27
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.
# When driving on unpaved roads or o road, regularly check the vehicle underside.
# Remove trapped plants or other ammable material, in particular.
# If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

28 General notes
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.
If the underbody panelling is damaged, ammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may

ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
or
# If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and tra c conditions, and contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and an electric motor. The energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the highvoltage on-board electrical system.

& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.
# Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged.

General notes 29

# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS).
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in di erent countries Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certi ed according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.

systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html

The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.
Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi cantly less noise when stationary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly reduced noise generated.

vehicle installed radio components Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of conformity:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information

30 General notes

systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the Radio Regulations 2017 directive. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html

You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. For the United Kingdom only:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information

For Brazil only: Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems. For Jamaica only: All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA. For Nigeria only:
Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

For Russia only:
The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Ukraine only:

General notes 31

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Wireless applications in the vehicle Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.

32 General notes
Wireless applications in the vehicle Technology Remote Keyless Entry Wireless Power Transmission Remote Keyless Entry Wireless Power Transmission

Frequency range 20 kHz (9­90 kHz) 105 kHz (90­119 kHz) 120 kHz (119­135 kHz) 127 kHz (119­135 kHz)

Near- eld communication
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones
RLAN

13.553­13.567 MHz 433 MHz (433.05­434.79 MHz)
868 MHz (868.0­868.6 MHz)
869 MHz (868.7­869.2 MHz)
2.4 GHz ISM band (2400­2483.5 MHz) 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150­5250 MHz)

Transmission output/magnetic eld strength  72 dBA/m at 10m  42 dBA/m at 10m  42 dBA/m at 10m  66 dBA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz  42 dBA/m at 10m  10 mW ERP
 25 mW ERP
 25 mW ERP
 100 mW EIRP  25 mW EIRP

Technology Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN Remote Keyless Entry 76 GHz radar Carsharing Module
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit)

Frequency range
5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725­5875 MHz)
7.25 GHz UWB (6.0­8.5 GHz)
76­77 GHz
NFC: 13.553­13.567 MHz Bluetooth®: 2402­2480 MHz
Bluetooth®: 2400­2483.5 MHz WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 2400­2483.5 MHz WLAN 5 GHz: 5150­5250 MHz 5725­5875 MHz
E-GSM (900 MHz) GSM (1800 MHz)

General notes 33
Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
 25 mW EIRP
 -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean  0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak
 55 dBm peak EIRP
NFC:  42 dBA/m at 10 m Bluetooth®:  +4 dBm (class 2)
Bluetooth®: -0.8 dBm WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 14.5 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 20.5 dBm 13.3 dBm
+33 dBm +30 dBm

34 General notes Technology RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS)
Information about the speci c absorption rate For France only:

Frequency range
UMTS (Band I, III, VIII)
LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28)
GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3)
GNSS (1559­1610 MHz)

Transmission output/magnetic eld strength +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB) +23 dBm (±2 dB) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
< +23 dBm (±1 dB) Receiving only

The values were determined and tested in accord- regarding the indication of the speci c absorption

ance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline

rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

Information about the speci c absorption rate

Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)

SAR value in W/kg

Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg

Hermes 2.1

< 0.4 W/kg

Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg

DAI RSE

1.8 W/kg

Tablet PC SM-T230NZ

0.7 W/kg

NRCS2P

0.003 W/kg

NTG7RSU

0.07 W/kg

NTG7 MID, NTG7 HIGH, NTG7 PREMIUM, NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS, NTG7 MID LFT2, NTG7 HIGH LFT2, NTG7 PREMIUM LFT2, NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS LFT2

0.08 W/kg

Applicable limit value
2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 4 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg

General notes 35

36 General notes

Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)
RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1
NTG6N MID/ENTRY NTG6N HIGH NTG6N HIGH2

SAR value in W/kg
0.036 W/kg 0.199 W/kg

Importer information for wireless components
For Moldova only: Importer S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2
For Turkey only: Importer Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.. Genel Merkez Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman ah Cad. No: 6/1 34522 Esenyurt/stanbul

For Ukraine only: Importer PJSC "AUTOCAPITAL" Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2 01004 Kyiv Ukraine
For the United Kingdom only: Importer Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England

Applicable limit value
2 W/kg 4 W/kg
Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England
Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity 1. The undersigned, representing

Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack Type, Number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 D) A 639 580 03 18 E) A 910 580 00 00 F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00 Year of manufacture: 2020 Complies with all relevant provisions

General notes 37

Directive No. 2006/42/EC
b)
Description and purpose of use:
Car jack is intended solely for li ing of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.
3.
References of harmonized and other standards or speci cations
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435,
Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s.
4.
Hradec nad Moravicí
Place
5.
05.10.2020

Date Engineer Petr Petr [Signature] Director of division ZZ
TIREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity, CE We, Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. ul. Fabryczna 20B 55-080 Pietrzykowice Poland (1) hereby declare that the product Electric air pump (2) Models: (3)

38 General notes

5N0 012 615C
5N0 012 615F
9P1 012 615A
9P1 012 615B

1EA 012 615
8P0 012 615A
8P0 012 615E
7P0 012 617A

4L0 012 615
760 012 615
A000583 5001
6898012

3220901 2
8888002 695

meet all the essential requirements for the following guidelines: (4)
2006/42/EC (EC Machinery Directive)
2014/30/EU (EC EMC Directive)
2000/14/EC (EC Outdoor Noise Directive)
Person authorised to compile the technical documents referred to in Annex VII A of Directive 2006/42/EC:
Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.
Dominik Gschwender (5)
ul. Fabryczna 20B
55-080 Pietrzykowice
Poland

Applied harmonised standards: (6) DIN EN 12100:2012 / DIN EN ISO 3744:1995 DIN EN 60204-1:2006 / DIN EN ISO 2151:2009 DIN EN 60335-1:2012 / DIN EN ISO 4871:2009 DIN EN 1012-1:2011 / DIN EN ISO13732-1:2008 DIN EN 55012:2010 / DIN EN 61000-6-3:2011 DIN EN 61000-6-1:2016 Other technical standards and speci cations applied: none (7) Pietrzykowice, 23.04.2019 [Signature, D. Gschwender] Dominik Gschwender, general management Note: this declaration loses its validity if technical or operational changes are made without the consent of the manufacturer.
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for

reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your Mercedes-Benz service centre.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.
# Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 163).

General notes 39
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects:
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system
R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Quali ed specialist workshop
A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works.
Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop:
R Safety-relevant works
R Service and maintenance work
R Repair work
R Modi cations as well as installations and conversions
R Work on electronic components
R Plug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system

40 General notes
MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre.

can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.

Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:
R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehi-
cle-speci c supplements and further supplementary documents R technical data for the vehicle R tra c rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Information on the REACH regulation EU and EFTA countries only: the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup-

ply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).
MercedesBenz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to MercedesBenz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.
Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:
R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par

General notes 41

with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:
R Medical aids malfunctioning
R Adverse health e ects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.
Plug-in hybrid
When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components:
R the power supply equipment

This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example. R vehicle components carrying live voltage This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop: R vehicle components carrying live voltage R transmission aerials R multimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Implied warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
# Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

42 General notes

Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle
Electronic control units Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.
The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.
Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal o ence.

Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.
This includes the following data, for example:
R vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat-

General notes 43

ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored:
R operating status of system components, such as ll levels, tyre pressure or battery status
R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
R system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
R information on events leading to vehicle damage
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.
If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break-

down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.
In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example:
R seat and steering wheel positions
R suspension and climate control settings
R individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example:
R multimedia data, such as music, lms or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
R entered navigation destinations
R data about the use of Internet services

44 General notes

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.
This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.
Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of

use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged.
For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection o cers.
At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

General notes 45

46 Occupant safety

Restraint system
Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following components:
R Seat belt system
R Airbags
R Child restraint system
R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly.
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible.
R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.
# Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their so ware.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Restraint system functionality
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the vehicle is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
All vehicles, except plug-in hybrid:
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

Occupant safety 47
Function of the restraint system in an accident
How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident:
R Frontal impact
R Rear impact
R Side impact
R Only for certain countries: rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is

48 Occupant safety
not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in su ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover1
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
R Knee airbag: frontal impact
R Side airbag: side impact
R Window airbag: side impact, rollover1, frontal impact
1) Only for certain countries.
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the

journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 57).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components
The airbag parts are hot a er an airbag has been deployed.
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:
R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing.
R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term

breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

Occupant safety 49

# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 104).
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t tightly and snugly across the body.
R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.

Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 62).
Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 118).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

50 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall
in a suitable restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty R modi cations have been made to the seat
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modi ed seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The sports seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you t a di erent multipoint seat belt, for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint system cannot provide the intended level of protection.

Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be openings in the seat backrest. These openings have no function.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modi ed seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident.
# Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
# Never modify the seat belt system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately

replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Occupant safety 51

* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner.
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corresponding seat.
% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 48).

% Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 118). Information on tting a child restraint system and on children travelling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 66).
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: a er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust-

52 Occupant safety

ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 52).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.

You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the le hand side of the steering wheel (/ page 273).
If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.
In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel.

Releasing seat belts
# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

Airbags Overview of airbags
1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage R Window airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the codriver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Occupant safety 53
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 78). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 77).
Information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 57).
* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:
R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.

54 Occupant safety

R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protection provided by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a correctly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following:
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags.
R Observe the following information.
# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible.
When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 104).

R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
R The occupants must always keep their feet on the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 62).
R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular:
R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).

R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R There are no accessories, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limitations of the protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not a x objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 53).
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.

Occupant safety 55
This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat. # Always stow and secure objects cor-
rectly. # Before commencing your journey, make
sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz.

56 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. # Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protection. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 78). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child

restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 77).
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 48).
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations:
R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

Occupant safety 57

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
R the classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
R the person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classication of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 57). Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of

the cockpit on the front passenger side (/ page 77).
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shuto When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.
The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test:
R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds.
R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger air-

58 Occupant safety

bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o .
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.
A er tting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 77).
Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not t the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat.
Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.
A er tting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o . Always observe the following information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could:
R come into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 77).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature.

A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of

Occupant safety 59
smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
R The classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
R The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.
R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.

60 Occupant safety
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 77) R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem (/ page 66)
PRE-SAFE® system Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the slid-
ing sunroof.

R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher ashing frequency.
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:
R when reversing

Occupant safety 61

or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear impact
The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R whilst driving
or R when entering or exiting a parking space while
using Active Parking Assist
Automatic measures a er an accident Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lights R triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 316) R switching o the engine

To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle o and on once more (/ page 160). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
R switching o the fuel supply
R vehicles with hybrid drive: switching o the hybrid system and high-voltage on-board electrical system
R unlocking the vehicle doors
R lowering the side windows
R displaying the emergency guide in the multimedia system display
R switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it.
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:
R braking more strongly than automatic braking
R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the speci c situation. In this way you can recognise potential risks and avoid dangers if children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 62).
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

62 Occupant safety

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:
R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for tting a child restraint system (/ page 66).
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a child restraint system to a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system
The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:
R a baby car seat
R a rearward-facing child seat
R a forward-facing child seat

R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci cations and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Only use approved child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:
R UN-R44
R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (/ page 67).
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages
Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 70).

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system correctly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.
# Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted or not secured, it can come loose.
The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants.
# Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use.

Occupant safety 63
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information:
- Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat (/ page 70).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 75).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 78). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 77).
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 57).

64 Occupant safety

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only a x accessories which have been
specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
MercedesBenz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.
It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.
# Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Occupant safety 65

# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Type1

BABY SAFE plus

Size category

E

Approval

E1 04 301 146

Order number2

B6 6 86 8224

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Overview of recommended child restraint systems
% Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1

DUO plus

Size category

B1

Approval

E1 04 301 133

Order number2

A 000 970 43 02

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

66 Occupant safety

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)

Type1

BABY SAFE plus II

Approval

E1 04 301 146

Order number2

A 000 970 38 02

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1

DUO plus

Approval

E1 04 301 133

Order number2

A 000 970 43 02

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)

Type1

KIDFIX XP

Approval

E1 04 301 304

Order number2

A 000 970 49 02

Type1

AMG KIDFIX XP

Approval

E1 04 301 304

Order number2

A 000 970 33 02

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for tting a child restraint system
Le /right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/ page 68) or

° i-Size child seat securing system (/ page 70)
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 72).
Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 74)
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 74)
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 57). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 56).
Centre rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 74)

Approval categories for child restraint systems
Only use approved child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:
R UN-R44
R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Identi cation on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system.
There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

Example of an approval label
R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.

Occupant safety 67
The identi cation IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
R Vehicle-speci c: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-speci c" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

68 Occupant safety Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129
Example of an approval label R iSize: child restraint systems in the "iSize"
category are approved for installation in vehicles with iSize mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled iU.

The identi cation iU refers to iSize child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats
Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:
R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems (/ page 68)
R Suitability of seats for securing iSize child restraint systems (/ page 70).
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems (/ page 74)

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the le and right rear seats
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 67).
Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot Size class ­ Equipment

Le /right rear seat

F ­ ISO/L1

X

G ­ ISO/L2

X

X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)

Size class ­ Equipment

Le /right rear seat

E ­ ISO/R1

IL

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Size class ­

Le /right rear seat

Equipment

E ­ ISO/R1

IL

D ­ ISO/R2,

IL

ISO/R2X

Occupant safety 69

Size class ­ Equipment

Le /right rear seat

C ­ ISO/R3

IL (1)

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9­18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class ­

Le /right rear seat

Equipment

D ­ ISO/R2,

IL

ISO/R2X

C ­ ISO/R3

IL (1)

B ­ ISO/F2

IUF

Size class ­ Equipment

Le /right rear seat

B1 ­ ISO/F2X

IUF

A ­ ISO/F3

IUF

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

70 Occupant safety

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching iSize child restraint systems
iSize is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.
° The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an iSize child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 (/ page 67).
Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 68) or UN R129 as per the following iSize tables may be attached.

iSize child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
Front passenger seat Le /right rear seat

X

iU

X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Fitting the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system on the le and right rear seats
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.
# If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.
# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:
R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.
When tting a child restraint system, observe the following:
O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.
ISOFIX child seat securing system (/ page 68)
or
iSize child seat securing system (/ page 70)

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
® When tting an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following:
O When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

Occupant safety 71
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
° When tting an iSize child restraint system, also observe the following:
O When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the

72 Occupant safety
respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
# Attach the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

1 ISOFIX mounting bracket 2 iSize mounting bracket
# Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the iSize child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Fastening a Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are tted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries.
# Always lock rear seat backrests a er tting Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock veri cation indicator.
If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or iSize and the vehicle.

Occupant safety 73
# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
(/ page 111). # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint
1 between the two head restraint bars.
Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: # Top Tether belt with one seat belt strap: guide
Top Tether belt 4 past head restraint 1 on the side nearest the door. or # Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps: guide one Top Tether belt 4 past head restraint 1 on the right and le sides respectively. All vehicles: # Fit the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

74 Occupant safety

# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting.
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 111). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching beltsecured child restraint systems

Rear seats Weight category 0: up to 10 kg

Le /right rear seat

U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg

Le /right rear seat

U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg

Le /right rear seat

U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

Le /right rear seat

U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg

Le /right rear seat

U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat R If it is absolutely necessary for you to t a
child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 78).

R Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 57).

Front passenger seat Weight category 0: up to 10 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1

X

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1

X

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1

UF, L

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1

UF, L

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1

UF, L

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

X Not suitable for children in this weight category.

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Occupant safety 75
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-

76 Occupant safety

tect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that

the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 74).
O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearwardfacing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the

maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of

Occupant safety 77

the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.
Make sure you observe the following information:
R Never t a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
R Always t a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
- Seats suitable for attaching belted child restraint systems (/ page 74).
- Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 75).
R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 77)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open

78 Occupant safety

Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 78).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R If it is absolutely necessary to t a child
restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 56). R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front

passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 57).
R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following:
O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 77).
O Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.

Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 74).
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat

Occupant safety 79

cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto.
# Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
# Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly tted.

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

80 Occupant safety
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

R indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's door

# To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases:
R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.
An animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
R switch systems on or o and endanger other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.

Occupant safety 81
# Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

82 Opening and closing
Key Overview of key functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic elds
# Keep the key away from strong magnetic elds.
Vehicle key 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp

3 Unlocks 4 Opens the boot lid
% If indicator lamp 2 does not light up a er pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 84).
The key locks and unlocks the following components:
R Doors
R Fuel ller ap
R Socket ap (plug-in hybrid)
R Boot lid
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Antithe protection is primed again.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the key's functionality.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri cation signal
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.
% Please observe: The selected setting for the acoustic locking veri cation signal must comply with the relevant national road and tra c regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking veri cation signal is forbidden by tra c laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road tra c regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap

R Plug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap/socket ap
# To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap has been selected:
R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap are unlocked.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap/socket ap has been selected (plug-in-hybrid):
R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap/socket ap are unlocked.

Opening and closing 83
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available.
You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
# To deactivate: press the ß button on the key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the key.
% When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre console, the function of the key is automatically activated (/ page 160).

84 Opening and closing Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key
# Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
# Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.
Inserting the emergency key # Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.
Replacing the key battery
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-
ment does not close securely, do not use the key any longer and keep it out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 84).

# Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this.
# Push in battery compartment 3.
# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages.

Problems with the key, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 82).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 84).
# Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 89). # Have the key checked at a quali ed specialist
workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

Opening and closing 85
R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

86 Opening and closing
& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. # Never leave persons, in particular chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle. # If there are persons in the vehicle, do not
activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations: R The vehicle is locked using the key. R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated (/ page 309).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. % A er locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.

You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 103). Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/ page 85).
# Pull door handle 1.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
# To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked. This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap.

Plug-in hybrid: the socket ap is also locked and unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car. The vehicle is not unlocked: R if you have locked the vehicle using the key R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
Requirements: R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door on which the
door handle is used are closed.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
or # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Observe the notes: R on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 334)
R on using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 336)

Opening and closing 87
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed.

88 Opening and closing

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 96).
If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid is automatically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the key has been deactivated. R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 83). # Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 82). # Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 84). # Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 89). # Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:
R while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed
R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer

Opening and closing 89

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key
% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, rst press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 84).
# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover.
# Pull and hold the door handle.
# Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
# Release the door handle.

# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated rmly.

90 Opening and closing Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
# To lock the le -hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Boot Opening the boot lid
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before
opening the boot lid. # Never drive with the boot lid open.

* NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles above the vehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.
# Therefore, make sure that there is su cient clearance above the boot lid.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 92).

Opening and closing 91

# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid opens.
or
# Press and hold the p button on the key.

# With the boot lid unlocked, press the top of Mercedes star 2.
% To open, pull on the folded-out Mercedes star when the reversing camera is activated.
Closing the boot lid
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the boot lid will not be locked and will pop open again.
Note that the boot lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs:
R You have locked the vehicle and close the boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle.
and
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.

92 Opening and closing

Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
# To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the boot lid by performing a kicking movement under the bumper.
Observe the notes when opening the boot lid (/ page 90).

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kick-
ing movement within the detection range of the sensors.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
or # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Observe the following notes:
R The key is behind the vehicle.
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

1 Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-
thetic leg.

Opening and closing 93
The boot lid could be opened unintentionally, in the following situations:
R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the fuel pump hose, charging cable or luggage.
R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
R A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 83) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

94 Opening and closing
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.
# Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.

1 Closing 2 To open
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.
# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

Opening and closing 95

When the vehicle is switched o , you can continue to operate the side windows.
This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
R during resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Automatic function of the side windows
In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched o: R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. R in extreme temperatures R a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.
If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. A er another automatic closing process, the automatic function for the sunroof and side windows may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

96 Opening and closing

Requirements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R The side windows are opened.
R The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened rst.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Requirements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
# Press and hold the ß button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is locked.
R The side windows are closed.
R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button.
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 87).
Resolving problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.
# Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
# Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 82).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 84).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

Opening and closing 97
# During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

98 Opening and closing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure that
no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# When a roof luggage rack is tted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

1 Raise 2 Open 3 Close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open.

Opening and closing 99

# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is tted.
# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: brie y press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
R towards the end of the closing procedure.
R during resetting.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

100 Opening and closing

The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched o in the following situations:
R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
R in extreme temperatures
R a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.
Rain-closing feature when driving Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, brie y push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards.
% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering".

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately a er it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately a er automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:
# Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.
# Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind
# Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
# Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-the protection Function of the immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the boot lid is opened R when the bonnet is opened R when interior protection is triggered
(/ page 103)

Opening and closing 101
R when tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 102)
The ATA system is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

102 Opening and closing

Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is primed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:
R a er unlocking the vehicle with the key
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre (/ page 316).
Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
key.
or
# Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the key
outside the vehicle.
Function of tow-away protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed. Tow-away protection is automatically primed a er approximately 60 seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R boot lid
Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the
key

R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 212).
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection.

Function of interior protection
When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R boot lid
Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the
key R a er pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment (/ page 160)
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R when there are moving objects such as mas-
cots in the vehicle interior R when a side window is open R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Priming/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection.

Opening and closing 103

104 Seats and stowing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion

R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
R You can move your legs freely
R You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly
R You have a good overview of the tra c conditions
R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
Vehicles with an AMG performance seat: if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, this can lead to noise caused by the seat belt tongue knocking against the seat. You can prevent this by sliding the seat belt tongue upwards with the belt clip. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the belt clip is pushed down. Only then will the seat belt t tight to the body.

Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (without Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Seats and stowing 105
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

106 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints tted.
# Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage.

# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until
the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# Li lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2
until the desired position has been reached.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Seats and stowing 107
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.

108 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints tted.
# Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage.

# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

Adjusting the seat fore-and-a position

Seats and stowing 109
# To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

# Li lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length (driver's
seat only): li lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

110 Seats and stowing Adjusting the front seat electrically
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-a position # Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 117).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 So er 3 Lower 4 Firmer # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of
the backrest.

Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints manually
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints tted.
# Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. For vehicles with sports seats, it is not possible to adjust the front head restraints.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# To move forwards: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forwards.
# To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards.

Seats and stowing 111 Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically In vehicles with sports seats, it is not possible to adjust the outer head restraints.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

112 Seats and stowing Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints Removing
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 120).
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the notches
on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Con guring the seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Selecting the massage programme for the front seats
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on or o .
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort # Select Î for the desired seat. # Con rm the prompt.

Switching the seat heating on/o
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or docu-

ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.
# Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

Seats and stowing 113
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches o .
Switching the seat ventilation on/o
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

114 Seats and stowing
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Unlocking
# Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.

# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
Locking # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering col-
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/o Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.
# Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the vehicle o , the steering wheel heater will switch o .

Seats and stowing 115
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process
is complete before driving o .
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no-one has any body parts in
the range of movement of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stopped.

116 Seats and stowing

You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature
Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when:
R You switch the ignition o when the driver's door is open
R You open the driver's door when the ignition is switched o

% The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already at the front of the backrest adjustment range.
The driver's seat will move back to the last drive position when:
R You switch the ignition on with the driver's door closed.
R You close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on
The last drive position will be saved when:
R You switch the ignition o .
R You call up the seat settings via the memory function.
R You save the seat settings via the memory function.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic seat adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.
Memory function Function of the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants ­ particularly children ­ could become trapped.
# During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel.
# If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the ignition is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.
You can save settings for the following systems:
R Seat, backrest and head restraint
R Outside mirrors
R Head-up display

Seats and stowing 117 Operating the memory function Storing
# Set the desired position for all systems. # Brie y press memory button V and then
press preset position 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

118 Seats and stowing
# To call up: press and brie y hold one of preset position buttons 4, T or U. A er releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before
opening the boot lid. # Never drive with the boot lid open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip

over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shuto : objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 56).

& WARNING  Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be ung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear
seat armrest.
& WARNING  Risk of re and injury from the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, ammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

Seats and stowing 119
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the
tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

120 Seats and stowing

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:
R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants).
Information can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 386).
R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly.
Notes on driving with a roof load
R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 172).
% For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compartments
1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection

3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port
4 Glove compartment
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, the lock veri cation indicator will be red.
Requirements: R To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the
centre seat backrest has been unlocked.
You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards separately.

Seats and stowing 121
# To fold the le and right seat backrests forward: pull right or le release handle 1 and fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

Vehicles with a memory function: if necessary, when the seat backrest in the rear is folded forward, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly to avoid a collision.
# If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in the rear seat backrest.
The release handles are located beneath the rear shelf.

# To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards.
# Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.

122 Seats and stowing
# If necessary, reset the driver's or front passenger seat.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

Locking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest
Requirements: R The le and centre seat backrests are
engaged and joined together.
You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the boot against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the le seat backrest.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Le and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator 2 will be visible. Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator 3 will be visible.

# Fold the centre and le seat backrests forwards.
# To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards.
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).

1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)

Seats and stowing 123
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will nd information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

124 Seats and stowing
# Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is tted. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the boot lid can be fully

opened when the roof luggage rack is tted.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# When a roof luggage rack is tted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

* NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects.
# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.
# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the stowage compartment in the front
centre console R In the boot

Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console
# Fold up socket cap 1.
# Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

Seats and stowing 125
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a damaged socket
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
# When the vehicle is switched o , make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry.
# Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali ed specialised workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

126 Seats and stowing
& DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly
In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R if you touch the inside of the socket R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket
# Do not touch the inside of the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket ap closed.
Requirements: R The device is equipped with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards speci c to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (1.3 A) is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear centre console may vary.
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at USB ports using a suitable charging cable.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

# Open socket ap 3.
# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a re hazard.

# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic elds.
# Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone stowage compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

Seats and stowing 127
The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed:
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.
R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
R To ensure more e cient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone.

128 Seats and stowing
Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.
Charging a mobile phone wirelessly
Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com.

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of the marked surface on mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving.

# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.
Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure de ned in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.
Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br
# Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.

Fitting/removing the oor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

Fitting oor mats
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the oor mat in the footwell.
# Press studs 1 onto holders 2. # Adjust the corresponding seat. Removing oor mats # Pull the oor mat o holders 2.

Seats and stowing 129 # Remove the oor mat.

130 Light and sight
Exterior lighting Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which tra c drives on the other side of the road.

Light switch Operating the light switch

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation.

1 W Le -hand parking lights
2 X Right-hand parking lights
3 T Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp.
# Always park your vehicle safely using su cient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X
or le W parking light.
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position.

If the battery is insu ciently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driver's door is opened.
R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 138).
Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights are switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched o in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to L.

Light and sight 131

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or o
Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion.
# Press the R button.
Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
Regulating headlamp range (halogen headlamps) The headlamp range adjuster allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in relation to the vehicle's load condition.

g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occupied
1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied
2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied, boot laden
3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occupied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised

132 Light and sight # Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the posi-
tion that corresponds to the load condition of your vehicle. Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right

3 Headlamp ashing 4 Turn signal light, le
# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.
Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
Switching o high beam
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.
Headlamp ashing
# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light
# To indicate brie y: push the combination switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o the hazard warning light system using button 1.

Light and sight 133 Active headlamps function

# Press button 1.
The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:
R the airbag has been deployed.
R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent Light System function The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road.
The system comprises the following functions:
R Active headlamps (/ page 133)
R Cornering light (/ page 134)
R Motorway mode (/ page 134)
R City lighting (/ page 134)
System limits R The system is active only when it is dark.

R The headlamps follow the steering movements.
R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.
The functions are active when the high beam is switched on.

134 Light and sight

Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
nal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has le the roundabout or the junction. Motorway mode function Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.
The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of: R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera R the GPS

The function is not active in the following cases: R at speeds below 80 km/h
The city lighting function City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas
Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Intelligent Light System # Switch the function on or o .

Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following cases:
R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions.

Light and sight 135

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically.

136 Light and sight
The high beam will switch o automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 km/h R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is su cient
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/o
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-
tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display.
Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following cases:
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam
Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them.

The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam. At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su cient street lighting: R The high beam will switch o automatically. R The partial high beam will switch o automati-
cally.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/o
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position.

Light and sight 137
# Switch on the high beam using the combination switch. When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display.
Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time
Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Ext. light. del. sw. off
# Set the switch-o delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

138 Light and sight
Switching the surround lighting on/o
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Surround lighting
When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel

1 p Front le reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp
# To switch on/o : press button 1 ­ 5 accordingly.

Control panel in the grab handle
1 p Rear reading lamp # To switch on/o : press button 1. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting Setting the colour # Select Colour. # Set the desired colour.

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness zones. # Switch the function on or o . or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.
Activating multi-coloured lighting # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour. # Select a colour combination.
Activating multi-coloured animation # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour animat..
The chosen colour combination will change at prede ned intervals.

Activating welcome lighting # Select Colour.
# Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run.
Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Colour.
# Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change brie y.
Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay time on/o
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Int. light. del. sw. off
# Switch the switch-o delay time on or o . When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time a er the vehicle is locked.

Light and sight 139
Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen headlamps) Notes on changing bulbs
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these component parts. # Allow the component parts to cool down
before replacing the bulb.
R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass has been scratched. The bulb may otherwise explode.
R Do not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands.
R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids.

140 Light and sight Overview of the bulbs to be changed Halogen headlamps

Tail lamps

Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Fitting/removing the cover in the front wheel arch
Requirements: R The lighting system is switched o . R The appropriate front wheel is turned inwards.

1 High beam: H7 55 W bulb 2 Low beam: H7 55 W bulb

1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W bulb

Light and sight 141

# To remove: turn cover 1 to the le and remove it from the wheel arch liner.
# To t: insert cover 1 into the wheel arch liner and turn it to the right until it engages.
Replacing light sources in the halogen headlamp
Requirements: R Low beam: an H7 55 W light source is availa-
ble.
R High beam: an H7 55 W light source is available.

# Switch the lighting system o .
# Remove the cover in the front wheel arch (/ page 140).
# Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clockwise and remove it.
# Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove it.
# Pull the light source out of the socket.
# Insert the new light source into the socket such that the entire base of the light source is resting on the bottom of the socket.
# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.
# Press on the housing cover and turn it clockwise.
# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch (/ page 140).

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system
Switching the windscreen wipers on/o

1 Low beam housing cover 2 High beam housing cover

Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Replacing the tail lamp bulbs # Due to their locations, have the bulbs for the
turn signal light and reversing light changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.

1 g Windscreen wipers o 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent

142 Light and sight

4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer uid
% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 334).
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch o the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position
# Switch the vehicle on and then o again immediately.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 141). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
Removing the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.

Fitting the wiper blades

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 141). The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Switch o the vehicle.
% Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Maintenance display

Light and sight 143

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

# Remove protective lm 1 from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly tted wiper blades.
When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

144 Light and sight
% The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror
The outside mirrors re ect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.
# Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

# To fold in or out: brie y press button 2.
# To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
# Use button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass.

% If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, you will have to reset the outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
# To reset: brie y press button 2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as follows:
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
# If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

Light and sight 145
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The inside rear-view mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antidazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rear-view mirror.
System limits The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if: R the vehicle is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function
The parking position makes parking easier.

146 Light and sight

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:
R the parking position is stored (/ page 146).
R the front-passenger mirror is selected.
R reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:
R you shi the transmission to another transmission position.
R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing

Calling up # Press button 1 to select the front-passenger
outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic fold-in on or o .

# Press button 1 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
# Engage reverse gear.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2.

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control
In order for the air conditioning system, monitoring of the pollution level and air ltration to function correctly, an interior air lter must always be used. Make sure that the lter is installed correctly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Overview of the air conditioning control panel
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

Climate control 147

THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with stationary heater (example)
1 q Sets the temperature on the driver's side
2 Vehicles with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC operating unit with stationary heater: A calls up the air conditioning menu
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit without stationary heater: _ sets the air distribution
3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate control
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 148)

5 ¬ Demists the windscreen
6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 149)
8 Vehicles with THERMATIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): ¿ switches A/C function on/o (/ page 148)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): Á switches A/C function on/o (/ page 148)
Switches residual heat on/o (/ page 149)
9 Vehicles with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC control panel with stationary heater: & switches stationary heater on/o (/ page 153)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronisation on/o (/ page 149)
Plug-in hybrid with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC operating unit: & switches "Immediate pre-entry climate control" on/o (/ page 152)

148 Climate control
A Vehicles with THERMATIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): _ sets the air distribution Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): q adjusts temperature on front passenger side
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/o
# To switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or higher using the H button.
# To switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using the H button.
If climate control is switched o , the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control o only brie y.
Switching the A/C function on/o using the air conditioning control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air.

# Press the ¿/Á button.
Switch o the A/C function only brie y; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
Calling up the air conditioning menu
Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display.
Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel # Press the A button on the climate control
panel.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Select A/C.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the _ or
à button.
In automatic mode, you can choose between ve di erent air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained.

Climate control 149

Setting the air distribution
Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu
# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 148).
# Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P
or O.
# Set the air ow. % Several air distributions can be selected at
the same time, e.g. to air-condition both the windscreen and the footwell. The ¯ climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the rst seat row.
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via the air conditioning control panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side.

# Press the 0 button.
The synchronisation function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select SYNC and switch on or o .
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to mist up: press the
¬ button.

Windows misted up on the outside # Switch on the windscreen wipers. # Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o
# Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y.
Switching residual heat on/o
Requirements: R the vehicle is parked.
% Only vehicles with a diesel engine can use residual heat.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approx-

150 Climate control

imately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To activate: press the Á button.
Residual heat will be switched o automatically.
Pre-entry climate control using the key
Function of pre-entry climate control using the key Before entering the vehicle, the driver's seat area or the whole vehicle interior can be brie y prewarmed or pre-cooled. When pre-cooling, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat ventilation
When pre-heating, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat heater

R Steering wheel heater R Mirror heater R Rear window heater
Setting pre-entry climate control via the key Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
Switching on/o # Select Z.
# Select Pre-entry climate control via key.
Switching pre-entry climate control via the key on/o
Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently. R The function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
# To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to ve minutes for pre-heating and precooling.

Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be activated more than twice when the vehicle is switched o . # To switch o : push the & button up or
down. The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation
Pre-entry climate control at departure time
Pre-entry climate control for departure time function
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.

The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when the vehicle is parked.
When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the highvoltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge.
The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions:
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.
R The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently.
With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
For cooling, the following functions are activated as needed:
R Automatic climate control
R Blower
R Seat ventilation

For heating, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat heating R Steering wheel heater R Mirror heater R Rear window heater
Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
Setting a single departure time # Select ONCE. # Set a departure time.
Changing the active departure time # Select the pen icon next to the displayed
departure time. # Set a departure time.

Climate control 151
Setting the week pro le # Select WEEK PROFILE.
# Set the desired departure times, e.g. every day at 8 a.m.
Selecting the zone # Select Z.
# Select Driver's seat only. If the Driver's seat only setting is deactivated, pre-entry climate control takes place for the entire vehicle.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time
Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently. R The function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
# To activate: set the departure time (/ page 151). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain

152 Climate control
active for another ve minutes if the departure is delayed. # To deactivate: push the & button up or down. The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
Air-conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:
R Blue: cooling is activated.
R Red: heating is activated.
R Yellow: the departure time has been preselected.
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.

# Press button 1 . The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
Stationary heater/ventilation
Stationary heater/ventilation function % The following function is equipment-depend-
ent.
R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature.
R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature.
R If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode.
The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated in front of the right-hand front wheel.

Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/o via the operating unit
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
# Always switch the stationary heater o in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the stationary heater is running.
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of re due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.
# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that: R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with ammable materials.
R the exhaust gas can ow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with ammable materials.
* NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.
# A er heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Climate control 153 Requirements: R The fuel tank is at least Õ full.
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.
# Press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.

154 Climate control

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:
R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o automatically a er 50 minutes.
Operation using the app: the stationary heater/ ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes me connect app. You can nd further information in the separate Owner's Manual at https:// moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/baix/ cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html.
Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate menu 5 Auxiliary heating
# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 148).
# Select Auxiliary heating.

Selecting the departure time # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
TIME C: XX.
Setting the departure time # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
TIME C: XX. # Select the pen beside the time. # Set a time.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in
the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 334).
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the le (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go.
# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right.

Climate control 155

156 Driving and parking

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following additional topics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers: R Emotion Start R AMG exhaust system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG RIDE CONTROL R AMG steering-wheel buttons
Notes on plug-in hybrids
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation
& WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes o with water and seek medical attention straight away.
& DANGER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re.
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance.
# Call the re brigade.
The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor.

Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:
R The combustion engine is generally switched o.
R Idle speed only occurs in certain instances.
Characteristics when starting the vehicle:
R If the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, the vehicle can be started with the electric drive without the combustion engine (noiseless start).
R If the high-voltage battery for the electrical drive is not su ciently charged or the operating temperature of the combustion engine has not been reached, the vehicle can start with the combustion engine.
% Depending on the system, it may happen that even though the high-voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or no availability. Once the combustion engine has been operated for long enough, electric mode is again available without restriction.
% To start the combustion engine, the high-voltage battery can be used as a starter battery.

Driving and parking 157

Characteristics with moderate power output requests:
R The combustion engine is switched o as o en as possible during the journey.
R The vehicle can, depending on the drive program selected and the battery charge level, be accelerated electrically up to speeds of about 140 km/h.
Characteristics with high power output requests:
R The electric motor supports the combustion engine (boost e ect), e.g. when pulling away or accelerating.
R The high-voltage battery is discharging.
Characteristics when releasing the accelerator pedal during the journey:
R The electric motor is operated as a alternator when in overrun mode and during braking.
R The high-voltage battery is charging.
Notes on electric mode:
R Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi cantly less noise when stationary and when

being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
R When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the signi cantly reduced noise generated.
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS).
R If not all of the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, then the combustion engine is switched on.
% Vehicles with diesel particulate lters: During the regeneration of the diesel particulate lter, the drive programmes are not available or are restricted and the battery charge level may change.
Notes on the acoustic vehicle warning system:
R The sound generator generates speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions when driving forward or backing up at a speed of up to around 30 km/h.

R This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better.
R When driving at speeds above 20 km/h The vehicle acoustic warning system gradually switches o .
R The sound generator is o when the vehicle is stationary.
Manual disconnection of the high-voltage onboard electrical system
& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re.

158 Driving and parking
In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.
# Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
# A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

Requirements:
Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the following situations:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up in the Instrument Display, e.g. a er an accident.
R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered.

To operate the high-voltage disconnect device

# Switch o the vehicle. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Apply the electric parking brake. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away (see
the vehicle Owner's Manual). # Open the bonnet.

# Press release tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.
# Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched o .
All work on the hybrid drive system (including a er disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop.
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.

R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Requirements: R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The
brake pedal is not depressed. R Vehicles with manual transmission: The clutch
pedal is not depressed.

Driving and parking 159
# To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windscreen wiper.
The power supply is switched o again if the following conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice more.

160 Driving and parking

# To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is switched o again if one of the following conditions is met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:You do
not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R Vehicles with manual transmission: You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the
stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation.
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are
no ammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Requirements: R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Depress the clutch pedal.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shi the transmission to position j or i.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch o nonessential consumers and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the display message Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual appears in the instrument display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 160).
% You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 163).
Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display.
Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual message appears in the instrument display, you

can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Marked space (example with cup holder without cover) # Open the cover of the marked space 2 if
necessary. # Make sure that the marked space 2 is
empty.

Driving and parking 161

# Remove the key 1 from the key ring.
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3. The vehicle will start a er a short time.
When you remove the key 1 from the marked space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For further engine starts however, the key 1 must be located in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3 during the entire journey.
# Have the key 1 checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 and leave it there.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Depress the clutch pedal.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
% You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.

Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
R The fuel tank is su ciently full.
R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the journey You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched o a er ten minutes.

162 Driving and parking
Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin-
tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-the alarm system is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched
o.

R The bonnet is closed.
R The doors are closed and locked.
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. A er every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone.
You can switch o the vehicle at any time as follows:
R Via the Smartphone App
R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the key
% Further information can be found in the smartphone app.
Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system.
or

# Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Running-in notes
To preserve the engine during the rst 1,500 km: R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than
140 km/h. R Drive the vehicle in drive program A
or ;.
R Shi to the next highest gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.
R Do not shi down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not
depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).

R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed a er 1,500 km.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following running-in notes:
R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full system e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process.
R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R shoes with platform soles

Driving and parking 163
R shoes with high heels R slippers
There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving
If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-
ing.

164 Driving and parking
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the
stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shi ing down on slippery road surfaces
If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
ces to increase the engine braking e ect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the stationary heater is running.
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal
# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
# To use braking e ect of the engine, shi to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.
# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
# Have the cause recti ed immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips
The 12 V battery may not be su ciently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.
# Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.
# Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

Driving and parking 165
# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.
You should bear the following in mind:
R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Owner's Manual.
R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 118).
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads.

166 Driving and parking

Therefore, observe the following notes:
R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side
R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up:
R brake occasionally while paying attention to the tra c conditions
R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on aquaplaning Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:
R reduce speed
R avoid tyre ruts

R avoid sudden steering movements
R brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 365).
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.
Observe the following if you must drive through water:
R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body.
R Drive at a maximum speed of 10 km/h; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment.
R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to

the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
ECO start/stop function
ECO start/stop function
% The ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the instrument display for this.
If all vehicle-related conditions for an automatic engine stop are met, the engine is switched o automatically:
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You brake the vehicle, shi into neutral i when travelling at a low speed and then release the clutch pedal.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i.
R You activate the HOLD function or engage transmission position j.

Driving and parking 167

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched o in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.
% In transmission position k, the engine is not switched o automatically even when the HOLD function is switched on.
The engine restarts automatically in the following cases:
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You depress the clutch pedal.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You shi into transmission position h or k.
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R An automatic vehicle engine start is required.
Status display in the instrument display:
R The symbol è (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: The engine was switched o by the ECO start/stop function.

R The symbol ç (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: Not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
R Neither the symbol è nor ç appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: An intelligent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign.
R The symbol s appears: The ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.
If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the display message Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting appears in the instrument display. If you do not switch o the vehicle, it is automatically switched o a er three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function
# Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function o /on.
% A continuous s display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.

168 Driving and parking

ECO display function
The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style.
You can in uence consumption by doing the following:
R driving with particular care.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: driving in drive program ;.
R Vehicles with manual transmission: driving in drive program A.
R following the gearshi recommendations.

The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will ll up when the following driving style is adopted:
R 1 Steady speed
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R 3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted:
R 1 Fluctuations in speed
R 2 Heavy braking
R 3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically:
R The three segments will ll up completely at the same time
R The edges around all three segments will light up
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the

centre of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a xed reduction in consumption.
Regenerative brake system (plug-in hybrid)
Function of the recuperative brake system Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in overrun mode is initiated.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.
The regenerative brake system has the following characteristics:
R supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting
R converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy

% If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more e ciently energy can be recuperated.
System limits
The braking e ect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situations:
R when the high-voltage battery charge level increases
R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature
R when driving at speeds close to zero
R in transmission position i
R during and a er ESP® intervenes
In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system. Also brake with the service brake if necessary.

Manually setting recuperative deceleration % In the Î drive program, you can use the
steering wheel gearshi paddles to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode.
% When the vehicle is started again or transmission position h is engaged again, the standard setting is automatically set.
The following recuperation levels are available: R hà Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation
with ECO Assist (standard setting) (/ page 170) R hq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely

Driving and parking 169
R h Normal recuperation R h± Increased recuperation; strong deceler-
ation in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on downhill gradients
R h±± Maximum recuperation: maximum deceleration in overrun mode
# To increase recuperation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 1.
# To reduce recuperation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 2.
# Standard setting: pull and hold gearshi paddle 1 or 2 or engage transmission position h again.

170 Driving and parking
The Instrument Display shows currently set recuperation level 1, for example, hÃ.

Eco Assist function (plug-in hybrid)
% The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated hard drive navigation system.
ECO Assist is active only in drive programs A, Î, Ï and ;, and only in transmission positions h or hÃ. Permanent manual gearshi ing p must be switched o (/ page 179).
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate.
ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 273).

1 Event ahead, e.g. roundabout 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt

Displayable previous events 1

The following events 1 can be detected and displayed for the route section ahead:
R Vehicle in front
R Speed limit
R Downhill and uphill gradients
R Junctions and roundabouts
R Bends
The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows:
R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near.
R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away.
If ECO Assist is active, the "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside the transmission position display.
When the vehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for minimal energy consumption based on the distance, speed and gradient. The "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display.

Driving and parking 171

If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for minimal energy consumption. The vehicle will recuperate autonomously and thus charge the battery.
% You can also manually increase or reduce the recuperation in drive program Î. However, ECO Assist is available only in the hà setting (/ page 169).
If there is no response to the "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3, the segments will remain white.
The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed.
If the event involves a vehicle in front, the symbol will be shown in green as soon as there is a response to "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3.
If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive.

System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured.
R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, insu cient or out of date.
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
Function of the route-based operating-mode strategy (plug-in hybrid)
% The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated navigation system.
The route-based operating-mode strategy is active only in drive programs A and ;. When route guidance is active, data on the planned route is analysed. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system (/ page 292).
If the function is active, data on the further course of the route is evaluated. This includes, e.g. road type, speed limitations and altitude data.

172 Driving and parking
The hybrid system then adapts the operating strategy to the further course of the route:
R Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine are adapted.
R State of charge of the high-voltage battery is controlled accordingly.
R Electrical energy is reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. urban route sections.
R The vehicle automatically selects the operating mode.
When the route-based operating-mode strategy is activated, the energy ow display shows the status of the function as ­ active or passive (/ page 293).
The route-based operating-mode strategy is switched to passive under the following conditions:
R You are driving in a drive program other than A or ;.
R Route guidance is active.
R High-voltage battery's state of charge is too low.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has di erent drive programs.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the instrument display. = Individual R Individual settings
C Sport R Continues to o er stability but with a sporty
setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style

R Driving with the combustion engine and reinforced boost e ect (plug-in hybrid)
R Deactivation of the combustion engine when stationary (plug-in hybrid)
R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road
A Comfort
R Comfortable and economical driving
R Balance between traction and stability
R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid)
R Recommended for all road conditions
Î Electric (plug-in hybrid)
R Electric mode ­ driving without the combustion engine is possible up to approx. 140 km/h
R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
R Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode

Driving and parking 173

R Depending on the equipment, the maximum set speed for cruise control, limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limited to the maximum electrically drivable speed
R Activation of the combustion engine via the pressure point of the accelerator pedal (kickdown)
Ï Battery Level (plug-in hybrid)
R Prioritised maintenance of the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent journeys in the inner city/low emission zones
R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance
; Eco
R Only available for vehicles with automatic transmission
R Particularly economical driving
R Balance between traction and stability
R Recommended for all road conditions

R Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions and adaptation of the coasting characteristics of the vehicle to tra c (plug-in hybrid)
R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid)
% Depending on the situation, the cylinder can be brie y deactivated in the drive programs ; and A, depending on the engine.
% The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied.
Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics:
R Drive
- engine and transmission management
- Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R ESP®

R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment: suspension
R electric power steering
Selects the drive program % Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is
tted with either a switch or a button.

174 Driving and parking # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the instrument display.
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2. The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the instrument display.

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2 again. The chosen drive program appears.
Con guring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual configuration. # Select and set a category.
Switching the restoration display on or o # Switch Ask when starting on or o .
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional

prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.
% The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.
Function o : the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.
Function o : if the Î drive program was the last one active, and all requirements for the drive program are ful lled, this will be automatically selected the next time the vehicle is started. If another drive program was active, then the A drive program is set automatically.
% This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user pro le.
% This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. The drive program for the respective user pro le of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated.

Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info
# Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed.

R Outside temperature
R Operating temperature of the engine
% The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Displaying engine data
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info
# Select Engine. The engine data is displayed.
% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certi ed values within the country-speci c guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or countryspeci c guidelines).
In uencing variables that can in uence this are, for example:
R Sea level
R Fuel quality

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info
# Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed.

Driving and parking 175
Manual transmission Operating the gearshi lever
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

176 Driving and parking
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the engine and transmission by shi ing to a gear that is too low
# When changing between gears 5 and 6 push the gearshi lever to the right.
# Do not shi down at high speeds.
* NOTE Damage to the coupling due to improper use
Holding the vehicle on inclines with a slipping coupling can damage it. # Do not allow the coupling to slip in order
to hold the vehicle on inclines.

* NOTE Damage to the transmission by shi ing to reverse gear k while the vehicle is in motion
# Only shi into reverse gear k when the vehicle is stationary.
k Reverse gear 1 - 6 Forward gears i Neutral # Engaging forward gears 1 - 6 or neutral
i: R Depress the clutch pedal completely. R Turn the gearshi lever to the desired posi-
tion.

# Engaging reverse gear k : R Depress the clutch pedal completely. R Pull the gearshi lever up, push it to the le and then pull it back.
Gearshi recommendation
The gearshi recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshi ing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal rmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

# When gearshi recommendation 1 appears
on the instrument display, shi to the recommended gear.

Driving and parking 177
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.

178 Driving and parking Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the instrument display.
j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance.
% To shi into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the rst point of resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is opened:
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the car is stationary.
# Release the brake pedal.
# Switch o the vehicle.

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 205).
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
# When the vehicle is at a standstill, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:
R You switch the stationary vehicle o in transmission position h or k.

Driving and parking 179

R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k.
% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again.
% At very low outside temperatures below approx. -20°C, you may not be able to shi the transmission from j to another transmission position when the vehicle is switched o . If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the vehicle switched on.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance.
When the automatic transmission is in transmission position h, it shi s the gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:
R The selected drive program

R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed
Problems with the transmission
The transmission has a faulty gear shi Possible cause: R the transmission is losing oil.
# Have the transmission checked at a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shi s. Possible cause: R the transmission is in emergency operation
mode.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Shi the transmission to position j. # Switch o the vehicle. # Wait at least ten seconds. # Start the vehicle again.

# Shi the transmission to position h. # Have the transmission checked at a quali ed
specialist workshop immediately.
Manual gearshi ing
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
% For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regenerative brake system (/ page 168).

180 Driving and parking

When the automatic transmission is shi ed to position h, you can manually shi it with the steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shi s to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshi paddle being pulled.
You have two options to manually shi the automatic transmission:
R Temporary setting
R Permanent setting
The gears shi automatically when manual shi ing is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
# To activate: Pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1 or 2. Manual shi ing is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear.
% How long the manual shi ing stays activated is dependant on various factors.

Manual shi ing can be automatically deactivated in the following cases:
R Changing the drive program
R Restarting the vehicle
R When the transmission position h is engaged again
R Driving style
# To shi up: Pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2.
# To shi down: Pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gearshi paddle 1, the transmission shi s to the lowest possible gear.
# To deactivate: Pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h.
Permanent setting:
# Change to drive program =(/ page 173).
# Select drive setting p (/ page 174).

Gearshi recommendation The gearshi recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
# If the gearshi recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shi to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accelera-
tor pedal beyond the pressure point.

Driving and parking 181

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shi s up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown
in green.
Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range.

R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
R There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack Fitted.
R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters:
R Incline
R Downhill gradient
R Temperature
R Height
R Speed
R Operating status of the engine

R Tra c situation
% Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshi paddle (/ page 179).
Function of the 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
% In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.

182 Driving and parking
Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided. # Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle
and, if tted, the stationary heater and keep switched o during lling.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapour. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
# Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.
# Before you open the fuel ller cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.
& WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning. # Never refuel using petrol. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a petrol engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent speci cation.
Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R Diesel
R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.
# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R Petrol
R Marine diesel
R Heating oil
R Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
R Para n or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Driving and parking 183
# Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.

184 Driving and parking
* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise,
fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to over lling the fuel tank
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o .
If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty lling pump: # Do not switch on the vehicle.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid)

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o .

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.
R Plug-in hybrid: the fuel tank was depressurised by pulling the button before the vehicle was refuelled. This function is country-dependent.
% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating uids and fuel.
The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap.

# Pull button 1. Indicator lamp 2 ashes and the Please wait Depressurising tank message appears in the Instrument Display.
When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously.

The Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message appears in the Instrument Display.
% In the following situations there is a malfunction:
R indicator lamp 2 ashes initially and then goes out
R the yellow ; engine diagnosis warning lamp lights up
The fuel tank can only be bled if the conditions mentioned above are ful lled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the procedure.
% Opening the fuel ller ap may, in exceptional cases, take up to 15 minutes.

1 Fuel ller ap 2 Bracket for fuel ller cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type
# Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1.
# Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and remove it.

Driving and parking 185
# Insert fuel ller cap from above into bracket 2.
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel.
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o .
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tank ller neck is designed for refuelling at diesel lling pumps.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 litres of diesel.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a ller neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the ller neck cannot slide into the tank.
# Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
# Close fuel ller ap 1.

186 Driving and parking
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on re lling AdBlue® AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas a ertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
AdBlue® is characterised by the following:
R non-toxic
R colourless and odourless
R non- ammable
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from children.
Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.

Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 387).
AdBlue® is available here:
R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
R AdBlue® is available at many lling stations from AdBlue® lling pumps.
R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at quali ed specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many lling stations in AdBlue® re ll canisters or AdBlue® re ll bottles.
% Ensure the connection between the re ll container and vehicle ller neck does not drip.
Topping up AdBlue®
* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
# AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel tank.

# Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue® tank.
# Do not over ll the AdBlue® tank.
* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage
# A er topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® re ll container.
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® re ll containers permanently in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.
The following messages appear in order in the Instrument Display when the AdBlue® tank requires topping up: R Refill AdBlue See Owner's ManualThe
AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®. R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance a er the

remaining distance displayed has been driven. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. A er the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed.
R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed. Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the Service menu in the Instrument Display.
% The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.

Opening the AdBlue® ller cap
# Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1. # Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it. % You can also store the AdBlue® ller cap in
the fuel ller cap holder in the fuel ller ap hinge arm.

Driving and parking 187 Topping up AdBlue® Mercedes-Benz recommends topping up AdBlue® at a lling pump. If no AdBlue® lling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue® using a canister.
# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® re ll canister 4.

188 Driving and parking

# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® re ll canister 4 until hand-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the ller neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.
# Li up and tip AdBlue® re ll canister 4. The lling process stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely full.
AdBlue® re ll canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and AdBlue® re ll canister 4 in reverse order.
# Replace AdBlue® ller cap 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
# Close fuel ller ap 1.
# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
% If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the re ll to be detected.
# Start the vehicle.
% Avoid storing AdBlue® re ll containers permanently in the vehicle.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery
* NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural selfdischarge.
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery.
# To avoid damage, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
* NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery
As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decrease over the course of its life. Due to

this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical output can be impaired.
The following factors could accelerate the ageing of the high-voltage battery:
R a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time
R frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures
# To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery:
R Only charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) if necessary.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 25% and 30%. Do not

keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures.
R Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks (/ page 205).
R Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 15%.
R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored.
Depending on the equipment and national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:
R Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
R Type Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
R Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)

R Type Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
Combo 1 vehicle socket

Driving and parking 189
Combo 2 vehicle socket 1 Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with
alternating current 2 Socket extension for charging with direct cur-
rent

190 Driving and parking

% When using a CCS (Combined Charging System) charging cable to charge with direct current at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle socket connections 1 and 2 are used for charging.
Charging options for the high-voltage battery (mode 2, 3 or 4):
R Charging through recuperation while the vehicle is in motion
R Charging with alternating current when stationary:
- at a mains socket (mode 2)
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
R Charging with direct current when stationary (vehicles with combo vehicle sockets):
- at a fast charging station (mode 4)
Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the di erent grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements.

Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging e ciency o ered.
Stowing the charging cable Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the charging cable bag provided and secure it in the boot or load compartment of your vehicle.
Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently secured.
System limits
The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following:
R High or low outside temperatures
R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system
R Extended periods without charging

The charging time of the high-voltage battery may be increased by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Extended periods without charging R The maximum available charge current of the
charging facility R The charging current set (mode 2) in the multi-
media system (/ page 292)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a
mains socket that: R Has been properly installed and

R Has been inspected by a quali ed electrician
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
# Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for highvoltage charging of your vehicle.
# Never use a damaged charging cable.
# Do not use:
R Extension cables
R Extension reels
R Multiple sockets
# Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the

Driving and parking 191

manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle. # Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter.
Only the following charging cables may be used: R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle. R A charging cable that has been approved for
the vehicle.
The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. Shorter charging times can be achieved in the following ways: R Charging at a wallbox. R Charging at a charging station.
When doing so, always observe the local information. Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.

Do not li the controls by the following component parts: R The charging cable connector. R The mains plug.
When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a
wallbox that: R Has been properly installed and

192 Driving and parking
R Has been inspected by a quali ed electrician
# For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
# Never use damaged charging cables.
# Do not extend the charging cable.
# Do not use adapters.
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox.
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/ luggage compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components
Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example.
# For charging stations with a preinstalled charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious faults, such as massive damage to the housing or charging cable.
# For charging stations without a preinstalled charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
R Never use damaged charging cables.
R Do not extend the charging cable.
R Do not use adapters.

# Make sure to observe the safety information on the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is described as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a fast charging station (mode 4)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components
Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example.
# For charging stations with a preinstalled charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious faults, such as massive damage to the housing or charging cable.
# For charging stations without a preinstalled charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
R Never use damaged charging cables.
R Do not extend the charging cable.

Driving and parking 193

R Do not use adapters.
# Make sure to observe the safety information on the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.
The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of signals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is described as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when

charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Setting the maximum permissible charging current for charging at a mains socket
* NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current
If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat.
# Make sure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the set charging current.
# If necessary, reduce the set charging current or use a di erent mains socket.
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitabil-

194 Driving and parking

ity for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there.
# Check the setting of the maximum charge current using the charging capacity shown in the Instrument Display.
Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualied electrician. The charging cable supplied is set to a country-speci c maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. When abroad, observe the country-speci c laws when charging. If you have questions concerning setting the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Set the maximum permissible charging current in the multimedia system menu (/ page 292).

If the exact value of the maximum permissible charging current cannot be set, select the next smaller adjustable value. % If the vehicle requires more time than usual to
charge the high-voltage battery, check the maximum charging current settings in the multimedia system menu. Overview of the charging cable control panel The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process.
1 Supply voltage indicator 2 Charging process indicator

3 Temperature monitor indicator 4 Safety system indicator

Supply voltage indicator 1

Display

Meaning

Lights up white

The supply voltage is connected.

Charging process indicator 2

Display

Meaning

Flashes green

The high-voltage battery is charging.

Temperature control indicator 3

Display

Meaning

Lights up red

The green LED ashes simultaneously: overtemperature ­ the charging performance is reduced.
The green LED does not ash: overtemperature ­ the charging process is stopped.

Flashes red

Overtemperature at the mains plug ­ the charging process is stopped.

Safety system indicator 4

Display

Meaning

Flashes red

Charging cable malfunction ­ cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

Lights up red

White LED is o : power supply malfunction ­ cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket.
White LED is on: vehicle malfunction ­ cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test.

Driving and parking 195
If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight.
To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system 4 indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately ve seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a quali ed specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.
Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle socket
% Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.
The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.

196 Driving and parking
Combo 1 vehicle socket 1 Socket lamp 2 Charging process indicator lamp 3 Locking status indicator lamp

Combo 2 vehicle socket 1 Socket lamp 2 Charging process indicator lamp 3 Locking status indicator lamp
Socket lamp 1 ashes or lights up as with indicator lamps 2 and 3.

Overview of the locking status
Locking sta- Display tus 3

Meaning

%

Lights up white

Vehicle socket unlocked, insert or remove charging cable

%

Flashes white Malfunction during locking or unlocking

Overview of the charging process status

Status of the charging process 2

Display

Meaning

#

Flashes orange

Connection is being established

#

Flashes green Active energy ow

Status of the charging process 2 #
#

Display
Lights up orange Lights up green

#

Flashes red (for approx. 90 s)

Meaning
Interruption in charging
Charging process completed
Vehicle malfunction; charging is not possible

Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)
& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.

If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.
* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable connector
During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values.

Driving and parking 197
The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors:
R the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
R the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.

198 Driving and parking
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements: R The transmission is in position j. R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The vehicle is switched o . The õ display in the Instrument Display is o .
R The charging cable is not taut.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets: R Type 1 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3) R Combo 1 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4) R Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) R Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
Combo 1 vehicle socket

Combo 2 vehicle socket
# Press the centre rear section of socket ap 1 and swing the socket ap forwards and open. The % indicator lamp 2 and status display 3 light up white.

Driving and parking 199

% When the vehicle is switched on (the õ display is lit in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened.
# Press catch 7 to the le and fold open socket cover 5.
% Vehicles with a vehicle socket combo require only connection 8 for the charging cable connector. Open only the upper part of socket cover 5.
# To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source to the stop and set the maximum charging current if required (/ page 193).
# Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket connection 8 to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.

The # indicator lamp 4 and status display 3 ash orange and, as soon as the highvoltage battery is charged, green.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the Instrument Display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

200 Driving and parking

% The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse which protects it against overvoltage in the mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may cause the fuse in the building to trip or may interrupt the charging process. These functions protect the vehicle. A er the fuse in the building is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply without the fuse in the building being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically.
Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)
Requirements: R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.

Combo 1 vehicle socket
# Press charging interruption button 3. or # Unlock the vehicle.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

% Vehicles equipped with a type 1 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button 3.
# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 188).

Driving and parking 201

Combo 2 vehicle socket
# Press charging interruption button 2. or # Unlock the vehicle.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

% Vehicles only equipped with a type 2 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button 2.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. A er the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 188).
% A er the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching o .

Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)
& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

202 Driving and parking
* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable connector
During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values. The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors: R the power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged R the instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no

charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements: R The transmission is in position j.

R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The vehicle is not switched on. The õ display in the Instrument Display is o .
R The charging cable is not taut.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Combo 2 vehicle socket
# Press the centre rear section of socket ap 1 and swing the socket ap forwards and open. The % indicator lamp 2 and status display 3 light up white.

Driving and parking 203
% When the vehicle is switched on (the õ display is lit in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened.
# Press catch 7 to the le and fold open socket cover 5.
% The CCS charging cable connector requires connections 6 and 8. Therefore, it is necessary to open both parts of socket cover 5.
# Insert the CCS charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 4 and status display 3 ash orange and, as soon as the highvoltage battery is charged, green.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the Instrument Display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

204 Driving and parking

% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)
Requirements: R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.

% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
Combo 2 vehicle socket

# Press charging interruption button 3. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

# Press charging interruption button 2. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
% A er the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching o .

Function of the charge level display in the Instrument Display
1 Current charge level 2 Time at which completely charged 3 Predicted charge level at pre-selected depar-
ture time 4 Current charging capacity When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched o , the Instrument Display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes. The value for current charging capacity 4 may di er from the display on the charging station. At

Driving and parking 205
a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value in the charge level display is rounded o and shown without a decimal place. % The value in item 3 varies depending on the
setting of the charging process. It displays the charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge level will be reached or the charge level at the pre-selected departure time.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehicle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked su ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.

206 Driving and parking
# apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shi the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage rst 1 or reverse gear k.
& WARNING Risk of re caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no ammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain elds.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:
R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Engage rst 1 or reverse gear k.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 178).
# Switch o the vehicle by pressing the 1 button.
# Release the service brake slowly.
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation.
& WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement.

Driving and parking 207
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement.
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.

208 Driving and parking
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp ashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow.

# Point remote control 5 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete.
R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.
% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.

R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Driving and parking 209

# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.
# Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control.
% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even a er you have successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline.
% Support and additional information on programming:
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com

Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
# If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

210 Driving and parking
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Vehicles with manual transmission:
The electric parking brake is applied if the vehicle is brought to a standstill and one of the following conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle has previously been driven at
speeds greater than 3 km/h. R The vehicle is switched o . R The driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 211).
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary. R In addition, one of the following conditions
must be ful lled: - The vehicle is switched o .

- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
- There is a system malfunction.
- The power supply is insu cient.
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
If the electric parking brake is not applied when the driver's door is opened, the Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual message appears.
% The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched o by the ECO start/stop function.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o .

R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 211).
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be ful lled:
- The vehicle is switched o .
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
- There is a system malfunction.
- The power supply is insu cient.

Driving and parking 211

- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
% The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched o by the ECO start/stop function.
Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed.
R The vehicle has been started.
R Vehicles with manual transmission: a gear has been selected, you release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
R You apply the brakes and shi from neutral i into reverse gear k or a forward gear (1 6) when on level ground.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position h or k and you

depress the accelerator pedal or you shi from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground.
R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled:
- You shi from transmission position j.
or
- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.
When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying
# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

212 Driving and parking
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit continuously.
Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp ashes.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will

receive a noti cation in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.
You will receive information about the following points:
R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
R The force of the impact.
The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:
R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-storey garage.
% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following situations:
R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the paint is damaged by a key
R an impact occurs at low speed

R the electric parking brake is not applied
Notes on parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may su er damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging. Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. % Further information can be obtained at a
quali ed specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)
Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation.

Driving and parking 213

Standby mode is characterised by the following:
R The starter battery is preserved.
R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display.
R The connection to online services is interrupted.
R The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not available.
R The interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not available.
R The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are ful lled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:
R The vehicle is switched on.
R The vehicle has not been started.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle.

Charge the starter battery in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended. R The Battery charge insufficient for standby
mode message appears in the media display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)
Requirements: R The engine is switched o .
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Activate or deactivate Standby mode. # Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c conditions.

214 Driving and parking

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

4 Front camera
5 Corner radars
6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.

1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Front radar

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 339). The sensors and cameras must

not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 215)
R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 216)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 216)
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 217)
R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 217)

Driving and parking 215

R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 218)
R STEER CONTROL (/ page 218)
R HOLD function (/ page 219)
R Hill Start Assist (/ page 220)
R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 220)
R Start-o assist (/ page 221)
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 221)
R Cruise control (/ page 223)
R Limiter (/ page 223)
R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 241)
R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 240)
R Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment (/ page 248)
Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226)
R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 230)
R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 231)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 235)
R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 232)
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 234)
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 243)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 246)
Parking Package R Reversing camera (/ page 249)
R 360° Camera (/ page 251)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 255)
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 259)

Functions of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insu cient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously a er the vehicle is started.

216 Driving and parking

Function of BAS
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in
emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Functions of ESP®
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
ways. R When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:
R One or more wheels are braked.
R The engine output is adapted according to the situation.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.
Observe the following points when ESP® is deactivated:
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R The drive wheels could spin.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes in the instrument cluster, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:
R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Driving and parking 217

R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
R When using snow chains.
R In deep snow.
R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 469)
R Display messages (/ page 402)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:
R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
In uence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 173).
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 75 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.

R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.
Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit
the current road and weather conditions.
When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side: R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar-
geted, individual brake application on one side.

218 Driving and parking

R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.
ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if: R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not
detected properly by the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using
quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

# Select ESP. # Select On or å Off. % If ESP® is deactivated and drive program
Î was previously selected, drive program A is automatically activated the next time the engine is started.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of EBD
Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following:
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R both right wheels or both le wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function
HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.
R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened.
R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched o by the ECO start/ stop function.

Driving and parking 219
R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short
time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the Instrument Display. # Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
disappears from the Instrument Display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.

220 Driving and parking

R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is shi ed to position j.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake:
R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
R The vehicle is switched o .
R There is a system malfunction.
R The power supply is insu cient.
Vehicles with manual transmission The Brake immediately message may also appear in the Instrument Display:
# Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.
A horn sounds at regular intervals if, despite the Brake immediately message, you switch o the vehicle, remove your seat belt and open the driver's door. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the

horn tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. % Once you have switched o the vehicle, you
cannot restart it until you have deactivated the HOLD function.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

# Swi ly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following tra c in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:
R By ashing the brake lamps
R By activating the hazard warning lights
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This provides tra c travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake application, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also

switch o the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button.

# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Start-o assist
Function of the start-o assist The start-o assist enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably highgrip road surface is required, the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition.
Do not activate the start-o assist on public roads.
Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 216).
Activating the start-o assist
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use start-o assist, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.
If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident!

# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 218).
# Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
# Depress the brake pedal rmly with your le foot and keep it depressed.
# Engage the h drive position (/ page 179).
# Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 173).
# Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
# Take your foot o the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
# Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Cancelling the start-o assist
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Driving and parking 221
# Reactivate the ESP®.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take

222 Driving and parking

a break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - the fuller the circle, the higher the atten-
tion level determined

- as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.
Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:
R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.

R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
R If there is a strong side wind.
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 232).
R If the time has been set incorrectly.
R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:
R You switch o the vehicle.
R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist
Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest rest area. # Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.
Cruise control and limiter
Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your

Driving and parking 223

foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
MercedesAMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the Instrument Display R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not
yet activated.
R h (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears along with the h display.
% The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking e ect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situations:
R in tra c situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads
R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
R when visibility is poor
Function of the limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

224 Driving and parking

You can limit the speed as follows:
R Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas
R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
MercedesAMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the Instrument Display R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but not
yet activated.
R È ( ashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.
R È (green): variable limiter is activated.

A stored speed appears along with the È display. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the Instrument Display and the È display ashes.
The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations:
R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
R If the stored speed is called up.
R If you store a new speed.
Operating cruise control or the variable limiter
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h.
Variable limiter R The variable limiter is selected.

# To operate cruise control or the variable limiter: press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter
# To select cruise control: select h with the right rocker switch.

Driving and parking 225

# To select the variable limiter: select È with the right rocker switch.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a di erent button (/ page 228).
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter
# Press rocker switch 1 up M or down N. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).
or
# Select J with the le rocker switch. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
% When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
# 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).
or
# 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M.
Adopting a detected speed
# Activate cruise control or the variable limiter.
# If a tra c sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select J with the le rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter
# Select O with the le rocker switch.

226 Driving and parking

% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.
Information on the permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a speci c speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system (/ page 226).
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the Instrument Display. When you conrm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

Setting the limit speed for winter tyres Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyres limit
# Select a speed or deactivate the function.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel.
Available speed range:
R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 200 km/h
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic)
R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multilane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must

now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the Instrument Display
Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event (/ page 231) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator

4 Set speci ed distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis-
play
Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set
R k (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected
R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected
R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 231).
The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out.
% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

Driving and parking 227
% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The ç suspended message appears in the Instrument Display.
Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.

228 Driving and parking
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.

R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the tra c conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex tra c conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.

R The transmission is in position h.
R The driver's door is closed.
R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter
# Press the I button.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N, or select J with the le rocker switch.
or
# To activate with a stored speed: select J with the le rocker switch.
# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.
Adopting a detected speed limit
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

Driving and parking 229
# If a tra c sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select J with the le rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the tra c sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
# Select J with the le rocker switch.
or
# Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

230 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Select O with the le rocker switch.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
# 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).
or

# 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M.
Changing the speci ed distance to the vehicle in front
# To reduce the speci ed distance: press the right rocker switch up (Ñ).
# To increase the speci ed distance: press the right rocker switch down (Ò).
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 243).
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display

in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
System limits The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 241).
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly

Driving and parking 231

detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.
Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:
R at speed limits below 20 km/h
R in wet conditions or in fog
R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with tra c regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current tra c and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive

program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 232).
The following route events are taken into account:
R Bends
R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
R Turns and exits
R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Information )
% When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:
R Turning o at junctions

R Driving on slowing-down lanes
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
When route guidance is active, the rst speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is activated.
Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:
R If the turn signal indicator is switched o before the route event.
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is

232 Driving and parking

responsible for complying with road tra c regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations:
R the road's course not clearly visible
R road narrowing
R varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example at toll stations
R wet road surfaces, snow or ice
R when towing a trailer
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:
R If the driver does not follow the calculated route

R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. R ECO Assist is active.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based speed adapt.
# Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 231).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.
% Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Driving and parking 233

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the Instrument Display R Ø (grey): activated and passive
R Ø (green): activated and active
R Ø (red): system limits detected
R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt
% During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as grey in the Instrument Display.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 234).
The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives con rmation to the system:
R The driver steers the vehicle.

R Depending on the country: the driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not su cient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R Insu cient road illumination.

234 Driving and parking

R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or junctions.
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
R The road is narrow and winding.
R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:
R On tight bends and when turning.
R When crossing junctions.
R At roundabouts or toll stations.
R When towing a trailer.
R When the tyre pressure is too low.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention
to tra c conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select a Act. Steer. Asst. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning

Driving and parking 235

tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended.
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:
R Steering

R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Eva-
sive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).

236 Driving and parking

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out a er a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situation-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex tra c situations.

In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R Give a warning or brake without reason
R Not give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges:
The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations:
R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insu cient for the

driven speed, the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows this.
Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, moving pedestrians, and cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing cyclists
Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists
R at speeds up to approximately 50 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles

Driving and parking 237
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)
The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists

238 Driving and parking
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists
Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:
R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown
R releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is ful lled:
R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
R there is no longer a risk of collision
R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:
R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians.
R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.
R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.
Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have le the lane in which you are driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex tra c situations clearly.
Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

Driving and parking 239

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o .
If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the Instrument Display.
The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in multi-storey car parks.

R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
R In complex tra c situations where objects cannot always be clearly identi ed.
R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background.
R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
R On bends with a tight radius.
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process.
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist
# Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.
# Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated.
When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display.

240 Driving and parking

Speed Limit Assist
Function of Speed Limit Assist
% Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data, which is made available under the conditions of the Open Database License (OBbL). Further information can be found at: https:// www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with a multifunction camera and displays them in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). The system detects stop signs, thereby preventing the engine from being switched o by the ECO start/stop function.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can

be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Display in the Instrument Display % The illustrations show the Instrument Display
in the widescreen cockpit.
1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not supported. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered.

R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision.
Setting Speed Limit Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.
Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed. % If one of the following systems is activated,
the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 228).

Driving and parking 241

Tra c Sign Assist
Function of Tra c Sign Assist Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 214). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting tra c signs.
If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning.
The camera also detects tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

242 Driving and parking

Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a
restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Display: a
+ symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional tra c signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display.

If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes-
sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 402).
Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯ Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning occurs only if appropriate tra c signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone.

System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered.
R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision.

Driving and parking 243

Setting Tra c Sign Assist
Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
# Select Adopt limit.
# Switch the function on or o . The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Cruise control

R Variable limiter
Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 228).
Displaying detected tra c signs in the media display # Select Display in head unit. # Switch the function on or o .
Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.
Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor

the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.
Permanent status display in the instrument cluster:
R ¸ (grey): system is activated but inoperative
R ¸ (green): system is activated and operational
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the ashing of the red warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

244 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 213).
Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed.
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.
# Always pay particular attention to the tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clearance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to ash.
This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o . The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established.
The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:
R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
R when people approach the vehicle
R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.
# Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

Driving and parking 245
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers (/ page 243).
Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate signi cantly.

246 Driving and parking

R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electrical
connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
# Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 214). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will

be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer:
R Ã (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating.
R Ã (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating.
R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display.
The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator.
You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Driving and parking 247

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 248).
% The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in the following situations: Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.
Standard setting
R A lane marking and the edge of a rm road surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the rm road surface.
R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

Sensitive setting
R All situations described under the Standard setting.
R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 248).
% The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in all situations described under Sensitive.
Standard setting
R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent

lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
Sensitive setting
R The situations described under the Standard setting.
R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:
R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
R When ESP® is deactivated.

248 Driving and parking

R When driving with a trailer, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected and displayed.
If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 248).
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the sun or re ections.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.

R If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch o , cross one another or merge.
R If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
# Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent
on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is a ected by the following factors: R the road surface conditions R vehicle load

R the drive program selected
R the driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Reversing camera
Function of the reversing camera If you have activated the function in the multimedia system (/ page 254), the image from the reversing camera is displayed in the media display when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing.
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
% You can open the cover of the reversing camera manually (/ page 254).

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views:
R Normal view
R Wide-angle view
R Trailer view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Driving and parking 249
Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur-
face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear area 3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area

250 Driving and parking Wide-angle view

2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium distance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid

Normal view
1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

Wide-angle view

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
System failure If the reversing camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia system.

Driving and parking 251

System limits
The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:
R The boot lid is open.
R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 214).
% Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example.
The views of the 360° Camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing.
The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
The system evaluates images from the following cameras:
R Reversing camera
R Front camera
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

252 Driving and parking
% You can open the cover of the reversing camera manually (/ page 254).
Views of the 360° Camera You can select from di erent views:

Top view

R Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.
Guide lines

1 Wide-angle view, front
2 Top view with image from the front camera
3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors
4 Wide-angle view, rear
5 Top view with image from the reversing camera
6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle
2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
3 Your vehicle from above
The colour of the individual segments of warning display 2 is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:
R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m
R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 1 are displayed in green. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Driving and parking 253
When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer.
Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points
System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the following message appears in the media display:

254 Driving and parking
System limits The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The doors are open. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The boot lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the
cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 214). % Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a

heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 339).
Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear
Requirements: R The Auto reversing camera function is activa-
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 254).
# Engage reverse gear.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 251).
# If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of the reversing camera is not shown: switch o

the vehicle, press and hold the c button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again.
Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/o The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
# Switch Auto reversing camera on or o .
Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
# Select Open camera cover.

% The camera cover closes automatically a er some time or a er an ignition cycle.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using multiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately

0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-round setting in the multimedia system, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides (/ page 258). % The Warn early all-round setting is always
active in the rear of the vehicle. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system
Vehicles without 360° Camera

Driving and parking 255
Vehicles with 360° Camera If you have not selected the Camera & parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 10 km/h. The colour of the individual segments of the warning display is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m

256 Driving and parking R Red segments: obstacles at a very short dis-
tance of approx. 0.3 m or less Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the head-up display
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.6 m on the sides 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-
sons, animals or objects.

R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (/ page 214). Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Example: vehicles with 360° Camera

When rear segments 1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the é symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a di erent location.
If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes:
R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 339).
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protection Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detection range. In order for an object on the side to be

detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must rst detect the object while you are driving past it.
During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in colour in the display.
The segment colour changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:
R Yellow: approximately 30 - 60 cm
R Red: less than approximately 30 cm
In order for lateral, front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a distance of at least half a vehicle's length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be displayed.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a 360° Camera
1 Operational front and rear
2 Operational front, rear and sides
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red)

Driving and parking 257
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red) Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors. A er the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.

258 Driving and parking
System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact protection.
The following objects are not detected, for example:
R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side
R Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.
# When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements: R The camera menu is open.
R Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.
# Tap = on the media display.
If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning tone volume.
# Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning tone pitch.
# Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn early all-round.
# Switch the function on or o .
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced

Driving and parking 259

when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone.
# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.
# Switch the function on or o .
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist o ers the following functions:
R Country-dependent: parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist

As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the Instrument Display.
When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the Instrument Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display.
The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle.
When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the active brake application and automatic gear change are only available on vehicles with automatic transmission. You must therefore brake the vehicle and change gear yourself when parking or exiting a parking space.

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R You begin steering.
R You apply the parking brake.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: you engage transmission position j.
R ESP® intervenes.
R You open the doors or the boot lid while driving.
System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.
Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected

260 Driving and parking

during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
There is a danger of collision!
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly.

Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:
R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
R When snow chains are tted.
R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
R Directly a er a tyre change or when spare tyres are tted.
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er bottoming out on a kerb.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as:
R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a di erent position in the centre console.
# Press button 1.

The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.
% Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path.
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
# Select desired parking space 4 and con rm.
# If necessary, select the parking direction (forwards or reverse), and con rm. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display:

Driving and parking 261
select the corresponding transmission position. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Depending on the message or as required, engage forward or reverse gear.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Ø Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.
# A er completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

262 Driving and parking

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking procedure.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park-
ing Assist.
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a di erent position in the centre console.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.
# Start the vehicle.

# Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3 Left or Right.
% The vehicle path shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path.
# Con rm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space.
% The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched o automatically.
A er the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Parking Assist finished,

Driving and parking 263

take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle.
The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.
Manoeuvring assistant
Function of Drive Away Assist
% Drive Away Assist is only available for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display.
Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 264).
% You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 258).

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and tra c situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the tra c situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, for example:
R If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged.

264 Driving and parking

R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R If you shi the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system.
System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines.
When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available.
% Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 255).
Function of Cross Tra c Alert
% Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any crossing tra c when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.
Cross Tra c Alert is active under the following conditions:
R if the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace.
R manoeuvring assistance is activated (/ page 264).
% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 243).
System limits Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines.
Cross Tra c Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance. % Manoeuvring assistant must be active for the
function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 263) and Cross Tra c Alert (/ page 264).
Trailer hitch Notes on trailer operation
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Observe the following notes on the tongue weight: R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to
the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:
R Permissible towing capacity
R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
R Permissible gross weight of the trailer
R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
Ensure the following before starting a journey:
R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load
R The lighting of the connected trailer is operational
R Vehicles without LED headlamps or MULTIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/ trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

Folding the ball neck out and in
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. # Always engage the ball neck as descri-
bed.
& WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not been properly engaged. There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement! # Unlock the ball neck only when its range
of movement is unobstructed. # Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.

Driving and parking 265
* NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch
When a trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Requirements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
removed.

266 Driving and parking Folding the ball neck out
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will ash.

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in a vertical position. Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lockmessage will appear on the instrument display.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.

Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased or dry (greasefree), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the ball neck in # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly behind the bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the instrument display will disappear.
Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 469)
R Display messages (/ page 402)
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
Requirements: R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a
securely locked position.

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters: R Adapter plug R Adapter cable
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met: R The trailer is connected correctly. R The trailer lighting system is in working order.
The functions of the following systems will be a ected by a correctly connected trailer: R ESP® trailer stabilisation R Active Lane Keeping Assist R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist R Drive Away Assist R Cross Tra c Alert R Reversing camera R 360° Camera

Coupling up a trailer
* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
charge the trailer battery.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

Driving and parking 267
# Open the socket cap.
# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on the socket.
# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as it will go.
# Let the cap engage.
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable).
# Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.
Under the following conditions, a message may appear on the instrument display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:
R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA).
% Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.

268 Driving and parking
Uncoupling a trailer
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
* NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun brake. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
# Secure the trailer against rolling away. # Disconnect the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer. # Uncouple the trailer.

# Place the cover cap on the ball head. % Trailers with LED lighting: a er uncoupling the
trailer, switch the vehicle on and then o again.
Bicycle rack function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly
The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases: R the permissible load capacity of the trailer
hitch is exceeded. R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck
beneath the ball head.
Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users: R always adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch.

R always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle.
R use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.
R always properly secure the bicycle rack by attaching it to the ball head.
R use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
R always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.
* NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used bicycle rack.
# Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly as described below.
* NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball

neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to three bicycles can be transported on the bicycle rack. When mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg.

Driving and parking 269

The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 163).
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 367).
Notes on loading The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerody-

namic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.
Load distribution on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head

270 Driving and parking

2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis

Observe the following information when you are loading the bicycle rack with up to three bicycles:

Loading the bicycle rack

Total weight Max. distance

of bicycle

1

rack and load

Max. distance 2

Up to 75 kg 420 mm

300 mm

Observe the following information:
R Permitted towing methods (/ page 356)
R Plug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods (/ page 357)
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 358)

Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer
& WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails
If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at
a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
& WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the instrument display, you will not recognise limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety.

# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Instrument display and on-board computer 271
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from speci c systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the tra c conditions. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

272 Instrument display and on-board computer Overview of instrument display

1 Le display area of the instrument display (example: speedometer): speedometer / time / date / trip computer From start and From reset / range / audio
The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

2 Outside temperature
3 Digital speedometer
4 Time
5 Right display area of the instrument display (example: tachometer): tachometer / average fuel consumption / ECO display /navigation / G-meter / assistant display / power

meter / power availability display of the electric motor (equipment-dependent)
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter (overrevving range) is reached.
6 Index points
These show the selected display or menu content.

7 Coolant temperature display
During normal operation, the coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 120°C.
8 Selected drive program
9 Selected transmission position
A Centre display area of the instrument display (example: standard display for trip): Assistance / Telephone / Navigation / Trip / Media / Radio / Styles and displays / Service / Power meter (equipment-dependent)
B Fuel level, fuel ller ap location indicator, range

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel

Instrument display and on-board computer 273
£ LINGUATRONIC 5 ò To call up the home screen of the multi-
media system 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in the
Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior
Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

1 P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer
2 Touch Control, on-board computer
3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 281)

274 Instrument display and on-board computer

The on-board computer is operated using the le hand Touch Control and the le -hand back/home button.
When the on-board computer is being operated, di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
R Assistance
R Telephone
R Navigation
R Trip
R Radio
R Media
R Styles & display
R Service
% You can nd information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.
The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display.

# To call up the menu bar: press the le -hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
# To scroll on the menu bar: swipe le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or con rm a selection or setting: press the le -hand Touch Control.
# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To exit a submenu: press the le -hand back button.
Selecting the head-up display
# To switch on the head-up display: switch on the head-up display via the multimedia system or activate it on the menu bar by swiping upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. The head-up display menu will be selected on the head-up display.

# To switch to the head-up display: press the le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To set the three display ranges of the head-up display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
Full-screen menus Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the following menus can be shown full-screen on the instrument display:
R Assistance
R Trip
R Navigation
# On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen.

Function of the power meter (plug-in hybrid)
1 Combustion engine and electric motor switched o
2 Position in the display range of the recovered energy
3 End of the display range of the recovered energy
4 End of the display range of the combined output of the hybrid system

The following functions of the power meter are performed:
R The power meter supports you in electric-only mode and displays the output obtained from the hybrid system.
R Regenerated energy is shown in area 1 ­ 3.
R When the power meter needle is at position 1, the vehicle is switched o . The combustion engine and the electric motor are switched o .
R Power range 3 ­ 4 shows the combined output of the hybrid system.

Instrument display and on-board computer 275
Function of the electric motor power availability display (plug-in hybrid)
1 Start of the POWER display range 2 End of the POWER display range 3 Maximum recuperated energy 4 Start of the display range of the recuperated
energy 5 Current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery R Area 1 - 2 shows the output in electric
mode or boost mode. The POWER display supports you in electric-only mode. R Area 3 - 4 shows the recuperated energy.

276 Instrument display and on-board computer
R From point 3, the maximum recuperated energy has been reached.
R The current state of charge of high-voltage battery 5 is displayed.
Displaying the power meter (plug-in hybrid) On-board computer: 4 Content # Select Power meter.
Overview of displays in the instrument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist (/ page 260) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 258) h Cruise control (/ page 223) È Limiter (/ page 223) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 226) æ Active Brake Assist (/ page 235)

à Active Steering Assist (/ page 232) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 246) ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 416)
è ECO start/stop function (/ page 166) ë HOLD function (/ page 219) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 135)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 136) ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 240).
Vehicles with Tra c Sign Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 241).

Head-up display Function of the head-up display
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The head-up display projects the following information into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driv-
ing safety systems R Some warning messages
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent content can be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 277).

Display content

R Wet road surface
R Objects on the display cover
R Polarisation in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the head-up display.

1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and tra c signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control)
System limits
The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the following conditions:
R Seat position
R Image position setting
R Light conditions

Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer
On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY
The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R LINGUATRONIC

Instrument display and on-board computer 277
# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the le -hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected.
# To call up the Settings menu: press the le hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.
Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and LINGUATRONIC
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the le -hand Touch Control.

278 Instrument display and on-board computer

Selecting what the head-up display shows
(Example) 1 Switching the head-up display on/o 2 Le display area
Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning

4 Right display area Tra c Sign Assist Assistant display
5 Con guring settings 6 Index points
Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will
be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
Switching the head-up display on/o via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
# Select HUD. The head-up-display is activated.

MBUX multimedia system 279

Overview and operation
Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may di er from the description and

images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
2 Media display with touch functionality

3 Touchpad 4 Controller
Turn: adjusts the volume Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o Press and hold: switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone 6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system settings and favourites/themes
Further operating options:
R Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUATRONIC.
R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant.
% You can nd further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Anti-the protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . More detailed informa-

280 MBUX multimedia system
tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Home screen overview

1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the pro le
3 Calls up the global search

4 SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available)
5 Mercedes me connect active
6 Transmission of vehicle position active

7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time
8 Calls up the Noti cations Centre
9 Calls up an application using the symbol

A Application and current information
B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
C Index points and selected display area
D Calls up the air conditioning menu
E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVOURITES
% If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is countrydependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control
1 © Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3 G Press brie y: returns to the previous
display 4 ß Press the rocker switch down brie y:
shows favourites

MBUX multimedia system 281
ß Press the rocker switch down and hold: adds favourites and themes ° Turn controller: adjusts the volume 8 Press controller: switches o the sound 6 Press the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Press the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call
Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single- nger swipes.
# To select a menu option: swipe and press.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
Using the touchscreen
# Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing brie y.
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, le or right.
# To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one nger on the touchscreen.

282 MBUX multimedia system
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two ngers together or apart.
# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
% For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.

Using the touchpad

# To select a menu option: swipe and press.
# To use handwriting recognition: write a character on the touchpad.
# To open or close the Noti cations Centre: swipe down or up with two ngers.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two ngers together or apart.
Calling up applications using buttons

1 G Returns to the previous display 2 ~ Calls up the audio control menu
Swiping to the le of right: selects the previous or next radio station/music track 3 © Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad

1 y Calls up vehicle functions 2 z Calls up navigation 3 | Calls up radio or media 4 % Calls up the telephone

5 ß Press brie y: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or theme
# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen.
# Call up the application (/ page 280).
Functions of LINGUATRONIC
& WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

MBUX multimedia system 283

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:
R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed.
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.
With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
The following multimedia system applications can be operated:
R Telephone
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation

R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions Starting LINGUATRONIC
# Press rocker switch 1 up.

284 MBUX multimedia system
or # Say "Hello Mercedes".
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation
This product uses a classi cation 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop.
This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.

The camera is located in the overhead control panel.
If the vehicle is tted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can di erentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects speci c hand positions (poses).
System limits, display messages and notes for recti cation
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch o temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.
Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.

R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.
Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens.
Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro bre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.
R Recognition can be impaired by re ective clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by accessories, for example.
R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera.
Keep the camera's eld of vision clear.
R The camera is not operational.
Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

MBUX multimedia system 285

The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:

Interaction area In front of the media display or above the touchpad
Above the centre console Below the inside rearview mirror Above the front passenger seat

Interaction

Description

Proximity to the control element

The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a control element.
Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions di erentiate between driver and front passenger.
No speci c hand position is required.

De ned pose

A favourite is called up with a de ned pose.

Brief up and down movements

With brief up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on or o .

Stretching out a hand above the front By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is

passenger seat

switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is

switched o again.

Switching the reading light and search light and on or o
Requirements: R For the reading light:
- The function is available when it is dark.

- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror.
R For the search light:
- The function is available when it is dark.

- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat.
- The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

286 MBUX multimedia system Switching the reading light on and o
# Brie y move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or o for the driver or the front passenger.

Switching the search light on and o
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.
# To switch o : take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched o again.
Information on pro les, themes, suggestions and favourites For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le
Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.
# Make sure that when the position of the driver's seat is being adjusted via the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately:
# a) Tap the warning message on the media display.
or
# b) Press a memory function position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le.
Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own pro le without changing the stored pro le settings of other drivers.
% Information on pro les from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.
For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example.

The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then o ers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used o en. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an application.
Con guring pro les, themes and suggestions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles
Creating a new pro le # Select W Create profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current settings. # Select Save.

MBUX multimedia system 287
# Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user pro le .
# Select Finished.
Selecting pro le options # Select Ä for a pro le.
The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le R Resetting themes or favourites R Con guring suggestions
Con guring suggestions # Select Ä for a pro le. # Select Suggestions settings. # Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow
music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or o . # To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active pro le. Suggestions will continue to be shown.

288 MBUX multimedia system
Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.
Creating new themes # Select ©.
# Select THEMES. # Select W Set theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continue r. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry eld and conrm with a. # Select Save.

System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display
- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness - Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements - Keyboard language and handwriting recog-
nition - Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R LINGUATRONIC R Sound - Entertainment - Navigation and tra c announcements

- Telephone - Voice ampli cation to the rear R Connectivity - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R So ware updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset
Information on important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update

R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system
% If automatic so ware updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically.
The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available.
You have the following selection options:
R Accept and install
The system update will be downloaded in the background.
R Information
Information about the pending system update is displayed.
R Later
The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time.
Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched o .

MBUX multimedia system 289

If the download of a deep system update is completed and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this a er the next ignition cycle, for example.
% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation:
R The ignition is switched o .
R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted.
R The electric parking brake is applied.
If all requirements have been ful lled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multime-
dia system with external hotspots: your vehicle does not have a permanently installed communication module.
R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
# Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

290 MBUX multimedia system

% The connection procedure may di er depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
# Select Internet settings.
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select Add hotspot.
Connecting using a QR code # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using QR code.
# Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using security key.

# Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Enter this security key on the multimedia system.
# Con rm the entry with ¡.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN.
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
# Con rm the entry.
Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect via WPS PBC.
# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.
# Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.
# Activate Permanent Internet connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi network
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again.
Con guring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.
# Select Vehicle hotspot.

# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect using WPS PIN generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and con rm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect using WPS PIN input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be
connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
A security key is displayed.

# Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
# Con rm the entry.
Connecting using NFC
# Select Connect via NFC.
# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface.
# Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key
# Select Vehicle hotspot.
# Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

MBUX multimedia system 291
# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.
System language
Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language
# Set the language.

292 MBUX multimedia system
% If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)
& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions
While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the reversing camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when
the vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones

R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection
R Individual user pro les
% The guest pro le is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings.
% Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.
A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset.
Plug-in hybrid settings Con guring settings for plug-in hybrid vehicles
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ
Setting the charging process # Select Departure time.

The following charging times can be selected: R Once R Week profile
# Select a setting.
Setting a single departure time # Select Departure time. # Select Edit single time. # Set a departure time.
Setting the week pro le # Select Departure time. # Select Edit week profile. # Add new time # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every
day at 8 a.m. # Select a.
Setting the maximum charging current # Select Maximum charge current.

# Select Maximum, 8 amps or 6 amps. When the battery is charged, the charging current is limited to the selected amperage.
% For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. MercedesBenz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for the high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there.
Activating or deactivating route-based operating mode strategy
# Select Electric in city. Depending on the previous status, the function is activated or deactivated.
Calling up the energy ow display
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ
# Select Energy flow. The visualisation of the energy ow in the vehicle is displayed.

In addition to the energy ow, information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge of the high-voltage battery is also displayed. Functions of the energy ow display
1 State of charge of the high-voltage battery 2 Combustion engine 3 Energy ow 4 High-voltage battery 5 Status of the route-based operating-mode
strategy (/ page 171)

MBUX multimedia system 293
The active components of the hybrid system are highlighted in the energy ow display. The energy ow between the individual components is shown in colour. The energy ow is shown in di erent colours depending on the operating status: R White: constant energy ow R Red: high energy ow (boost e ect) R Green: low-emission energy ow in the case of
recuperation, electric mode and when charging the high-voltage battery
Navigation Notes on navigation
Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

294 MBUX multimedia system
# Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation.
# Avoid extended observation of the camera image.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information
The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c
situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.

The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active.
# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

Switching navigation on
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation)
# Alternatively: press the z button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown.

Navigation overview

MBUX multimedia system 295

Example: digital map with navigation menu
1 Enters a POI or address and additional destination entry options
2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active)
3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or o
4 Calls up the ON ROUTE menu

· To show Route overview · To select Alternative routes · Report traffic incident (Car-to-X) · To call up the TRAFFIC menu - To display Traffic announcements - To display Area announcements - To display Provider information

· To show Route list · To call up the POSITION menu - Store position - To display Compass - To show Qibla (available in selected countries) 5 Quick-access and settings

296 MBUX multimedia system
· To show Traffic · To show Parking · To show Motorway information

· Via Advanced options to use View, Announcements and Route

Entering a destination
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?

1 Country in which the vehicle is located 2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry 5 a Con rms an entry

6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language

A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can
be made in any order.

The following entries can be made, for example: R Town, street, house number R Street, town R Postcode R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name
# Select a search result in list 3. # Calculate the route (/ page 297). % You can nd further information about desti-
nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Changing country # Select the country indicator in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country in 3.
Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an
Internet connection in the status line with the Q symbol.

Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search nds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2.
The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1.
# Select the provider for the online service from the countries list.
# Enter the destination in input line 2.
# Select the destination in the list.
Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance
Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.

MBUX multimedia system 297 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped.
# Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.
or # Select ¦. # Select Set as intermediate dest..
The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

298 MBUX multimedia system

or
# Select Start new route guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.
Selecting route settings
# Select Z.
# Select Advanced.
# Select Route.
# Select the route type.
# Take tra c information into consideration with Dynamic route guidance r.
# Select route options with Avoid options.
# Activate Suggest alternative route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
# Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality
# During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre and will show additional information.
# To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.
Displaying additional information in the camera image
# Select Z.
# Select Advanced.
# Select Augmented Reality.
# Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.

Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger
on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two ngers on the
media display.
Moving the map # Move one nger in any direction on the
touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle posi-
tion: press \ brie y.
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up.
Switching motorway information on/o # Select Z.

MBUX multimedia system 299

# Switch Motorway information on or o .
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available and has been activated. R The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service: - The navigation services option is available,
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. - The Parking service is within the scope of the Navigation Services.

Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Displaying the tra c situation with Live Tra c Information
# Select Z.
# Activate Traffic.
# Select Advanced.
# Select View.
# Select Map elements.
# Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay. If tra c information has been received, then tra c incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed.
The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display

depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options.
# Set the options. If Traffic is switched o and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other map contents
# Select Z.
# Select Advanced.
# Select View.
# Select Map elements.
# Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENTS category.
# Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

300 MBUX multimedia system
Parking service
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear-
ance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the
permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.
* NOTE Before selecting the parking option
The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the multi-storey car park/parking area.

# Always observe the local Information and conditions.
% This service is not available in all countries.
# Select Z and activate Parking.
# Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option.
The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.
The following information is displayed (if available):
R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time
R Information on the multi-storey car park/car park, for example:
- Opening times
- Parking charges
- Current occupancy
- Maximum parking time
- Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace

the need for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tari s R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number # Calculate the route (/ page 297).
Notes on the dashcam
* NOTE Before using the dashcam
You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in partic-

MBUX multimedia system 301

ular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regula-
tions.
Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the
multimedia system .
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam
# Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions,
recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.
Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime-
dia system .
R The vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam
# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 301).
# Select the Individual recording or Loop recording recording mode. If Individual recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops.
If Loop recording has been selected, several short video les are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video le is

deleted and recording is continued automatically.
# To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device.
# To end: select End recording.
A report may appear in the following cases:
R For the Individual recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video le.
R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National border crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations regarding video recording. message appears.
This function is not available in all countries.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.

302 MBUX multimedia system

Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Telephone Telephony
Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
# As the driver, only operate mobile communications devices when the vehicle is stationary.
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around

and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 118)
R Stowing and securing the mobile phone (/ page 128)

Bluetooth® connection:
The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® pro les:
R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Pro le)
- The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit.
For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:
R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® .
Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate.
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

MBUX multimedia system 303

304 MBUX multimedia system Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
5 Options

6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search

Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.

R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode).
- You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the mobile phone in the foreground.
- You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background.
You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect new device.
Connecting a mobile phone Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
- R Accept a call - k End call - i Create conferen. call - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

MBUX multimedia system 305
R Managing contacts, e.g.: - Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favourite
R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: - Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message
Mercedes me app Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

306 MBUX multimedia system
1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button 1.

Making an emergency call
# To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it brie y.
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 305).
Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:
R Accident and Breakdown Management
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle
You can nd information on the following topics:
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
R Operating the vehicle

R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
R Other products and services from MercedesBenz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 308).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system
Requirements: R Access to a mobile phone network is available.
R The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region.
R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g
# Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

MBUX multimedia system 307

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre a er automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or break-
down situation.
R The vehicle is stationary.
R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries.
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.
In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display.
A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

# Select Call. R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 310).
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services.
% Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls.
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.

The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you a er a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.
# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

308 MBUX multimedia system

This will contact you to con rm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.
% If you select Later a er the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call
Requirements: R There is an active Mercedes me call via the
multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (/ page 305).
% The prompt to con rm data transfer does not appear in all countries.
If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? message is shown.
# Select Yes. Relevant identi cation data is transmitted automatically.

More information on Mercedes me: https:// www.mercedes.me
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service.
The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data:
R The vehicle is switched on.
R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
R The quality of the mobile connection is su cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R The available mobile phone transmission technology.
R The activated Mercedes me connect services.
R The service selected in the voice control system.

% A prompt for consent to the data transmission only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated
If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been conrmed the following data is transmitted:
R Vehicle identi cation number
R Time of the call
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Con rmation of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:
R Current mileage and maintenance data

MBUX multimedia system 309

If a call is made a er automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:
R Current mileage and maintenance data
R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been con rmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:
R Current vehicle location
If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an e cient service:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Rejection of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-speci c data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.
An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.
The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the

recorded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
% The recorded message is not available in every country.
Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect
% Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.
You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example:
R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

310 MBUX multimedia system

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 305).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system (/ page 306).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 316).
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/

baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html
Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management
The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 316)
If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
You may be charged for these services.
R Addition to the emergency guide a er automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 307)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal

support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.
If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

MBUX multimedia system 311

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con-
trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu
When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me
apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.
In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me
user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
me user account and the vehicle
R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the
web browser depending on availability
Overview of In-Car O ce
Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system.

Requirements for In-Car O ce:
R Your mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 305).
R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal.
R The In-Car O ce service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with O ce 365 or Gmail, and have connected the user account with In-Car O ce.
In-Car O ce functions
R Display pending appointments in the calendar
- Reading out calendar entries
- Calling stored telephone numbers
- Navigating to appointments with navigable destinations
- Deleting a calendar entry
R Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete
- Reading aloud

312 MBUX multimedia system
- Calling stored telephone numbers - Deleting R Noting calls - Declining incoming calls and saving as a
task in the Tasks & calls menu R Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed
O

R Managing e-mails
- Showing/reading e-mails
- Writing and forwarding e-mails
% You can start the In-Car O ce function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

Web browser overview
The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks

3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards

5 To refresh/stop 6 Options

MBUX multimedia system 313

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.
Overview of smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable.
Apps for Smartphone Integration
R Apple CarPlay®

R Android Auto
% For safety reasons, the rst activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.
You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
R So ware release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 292).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R Transmission position engaged
R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
R Drive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R Coordinates
R Speed
R Compass direction
R Acceleration direction

314 MBUX multimedia system

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on available emergency call systems
Two types of emergency call system are available to you in the vehicle: R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries. You can nd more infor-

mation on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ ecall/
The following applies for both emergency call systems:
R The transfer of speci c data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section (/ page 317).
R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory.

R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers o er mobile phone coverage.
For both systems, insu cient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

MBUX multimedia system 315

Di erences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network.
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

R If you decide to use the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network a er the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the in uence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.
% Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certi ed pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appen-

dix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi ed according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.
There is the option of deactivating the MercedesBenz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:
R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak.
R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of

316 MBUX multimedia system

the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data.
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly.
R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.
In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre.
R Should the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre not be available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.
Overview of emergency call systems
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are di cult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically (/ page 316) or manually (/ page 317).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Messages on the display
The following messages appear in the display of both emergency call systems:
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.

R G: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
% If there is a malfunction in the emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears on the instrument display.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call a er: R Activation of the restraint systems such as air-
bags or seat belt tensioners a er an accident
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is established with the
emergency call centre.

R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.
# Dial the emergency number 112 or an appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 305).
# To use voice control: use the LINGUATRONIC voice commands .
The emergency call has been made:
R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call

MBUX multimedia system 317
rescue teams and the police to the accident site. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the 112 emergency number or the appro-
priate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.
Emergency call system data transmission
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre. Depending on the emergency call system (/ page 314) activated di erent data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.

318 MBUX multimedia system
Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the inci-
dent) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not
This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.
% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public emergency call centre.

112 emergency call
R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the inci-
dent) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident

MBUX multimedia system 319

For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated:
R The current vehicle position can be determined.
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving tra c information, cannot be performed for up to two hours a er sending an emergency call.
Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system
Your car veri es the operability of the emergency call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds a er switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is

switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
Requirements: R The starter battery is su ciently charged. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
% The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example: R Russia R Belarus R Kazakhstan R Armenia R Kyrgyzstan

# To start the test mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least ve seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends a er the language test has been performed.
# To stop manual test mode: switch o the vehicle. The test mode is ended.
Information on data processing
Processing of personal data via the MercedesBenz emergency call system All processing of personal data via the MercedesBenz emergency call system corresponds with the speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)".
The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident.
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has

320 MBUX multimedia system

the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.
Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital interests of the a ected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR.
The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.
Data recipient The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are

speci ed to rst receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.
Arrangements for data processing
Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are ful lled:
R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation.
R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted.
R The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available.
R The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as is required to ful l the purpose of handling the

emergency call, however for no longer than 13 hours a er the time that an emergency call is initiated.
Rights of persons a ected by the data processing The person a ected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that a ects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person a ected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.
Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeau ragter für den Datenschutz, Daimler AG, HPC G353, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany

Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol 6

Designation Play

8

Rest

:

Repeat a track

9 û/ü ß 5
ª

Random playback Skip forwards/back Options Categories
Search

MBUX multimedia system 321
Function Select to start or continue playback. Select to pause the playback. Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. Select to play back the tracks in random order. Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. Select to show additional options. Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

322 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Z © j 2

Designation Settings Home Messaging Full screen

Function Select to make settings. Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu:
R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®)
R Playing back audio or video les
R Streaming online music

Authorising a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem and audio equipment.
R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP.
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª
With Bluetooth® audio, you can play back music les from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system.
# To play back audio les using the multimedia system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device
# Select Connect new device.

# Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes are identical, con rm on the audio equipment.
# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol ©

Designation Home

j

Messaging

û/ü

Skip forwards/back

MBUX multimedia system 323
Function Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

324 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Z

Designation Settings

2
8 f 4 ª

Full screen
Silent function Store radio stations Station list Search

Function
Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and tra c announcements R Frequency x function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent.
Select to switch to the DAB slide show. This function is not available in all countries.
Select to switch o the sound.
Select to save a station in the presets.
Select to have the station list shown.
Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn radio
% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.

Symbol Z

Designation Settings

ß
6/8 5

Favourites Play/Pause Browse

Depending on the frequency band selected, di erent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements: R A Mercedes me account is available.

MBUX multimedia system 325
Function The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite. Select to start, stop or continue playback.
Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account.
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R The data volume is available.

326 MBUX multimedia system
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
% The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio
# Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system tted. You can nd

out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equaliser
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume
- Automatic adjustment
Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system only) R Sound pro les

R Volume: - Automatic adjustment

Maintenance and care 327

ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or distance remaining before the next service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:
R Mainly short-distance driving
R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods
R In the event of frequent cold start phases
R Vehicles with a diesel particulate lter: in the event of frequently interrupted regeneration of the diesel particulate lter
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button
G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 273).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
# Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more o en than prescribed if operating conditions are di cult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
R Mainly short-distance driving

328 Maintenance and care

R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods
R Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.
# Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 327).

Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 70 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself (/ page 328).
A er the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored in a quali ed specialist workshop.
Resetting the active bonnet
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
# With your hand at, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing sound. The engine bonnet must engage in position.
# If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly.

Opening and closing the bonnet
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
bonnet is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement. # Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o .
Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

Maintenance and care 329
# Switch o the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewellery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch ignition system or fuel injec-
tion system components when the vehicle is switched on.
The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors

330 Maintenance and care
R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle rst if you need to open the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet # To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.

# Push yellow handle 1 on the bonnet catch to the le as far as it will go (palm downwards). Li the bonnet until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic spring.
Closing the bonnet
# Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a height of approximately 20 cm.

Maintenance and care 331

# If the bonnet can still be li ed slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the on-board computer
Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The bonnet is closed.
The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine oil level
One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display:
R Engine oil level Measuring now: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible.
# Repeat the request a er a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.
R Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is below "min":
# Add 1 l of engine oil.
R Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max":

# Drain o any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
R For engine oil level turn on ignition
# Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. R Engine oil level System currently unavail.
# Close the bonnet.
Topping up engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.

332 Maintenance and care
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the ller opening. # Allow the engine to cool o and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
# Do not use engine oils or oil lters which do not correspond to the speci cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
# Do not use additives.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
quali ed specialist workshop.
% Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litre of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. # Top up the engine oil. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 331).

Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Maintenance and care 333
The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
1.5 cm over the marker bar 2.
# If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.
% Further information on coolant (/ page 395)

Topping up the windscreen washer system

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.
# Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70°C.
# Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

334 Maintenance and care
& WARNING  Risk of re and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller opening.
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. # Top up the washer uid. % Further information about the windscreen
washer uid (/ page 396)

Keeping the air-water duct free
# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power a er washing the vehicle
Braking e ciency is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # during towing # in a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

Maintenance and care 335

# Ensure there is su cient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
R The HOLD function is switched o .
R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched o .
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched o .
R the windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could open unintentionally.
R For car washes with a conveyor system:

- neutral i is engaged.
- For vehicles with automatic transmission: If you leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged.
% If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h Activate (/ page 336) .
The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated:
R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor is deactivated.
R The rear window wiper is deactivated.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.

336 Maintenance and care

R The air conditioning system is set to air-recirculation mode.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R Vehicles with 360° Camera: The front image is activated a er approx. eight seconds.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective setting.
Above a speed of 20 km/h car wash mode is automatically deactivated.
The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated:
R The outside mirrors are folded out.
R The rain sensor is activated.
R The rear window wiper is activated.
R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air mode.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the previously selected setting.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof remain closed.

R Vehicles with 360° Camera: The front image is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode
Requirements: R the vehicle is stationary. R the engine is running.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Car wash mode. # Select Start.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective setting. % For an overview of the settings made when
activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 334).

Deactivating automatic car wash mode # Select Stop.
The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automatically
deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
round-spray nozzles. # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could open unintentionally.
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the highpressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand
* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.
observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a
so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 339).
Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Maintenance and care 337
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas a erwards.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o a erwards.
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter uid.
R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matt nish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop.

338 Maintenance and care

R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
R Do not use car wash programmes with a nal hot wax treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
quali ed specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function
(/ page 214).
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matt nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care" (/ page 337). They also apply to matt decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably.
R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative foil is dull: Use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards.
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o a erwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and colouring of decorative
foils are impaired by:
- Sunlight

- Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
- Weather conditions
- Stone chippings and dirt
- Chemical cleaning agents
- Oily products
R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foilwrapped surface.
R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di erences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil.

% Have work or repairs to decorative foils carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Notes on care of car parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Maintenance and care 339

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts:
Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes a er cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
% A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 214).
Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 142).
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en.

340 Maintenance and care
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery) R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the
vehicle socket.
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents, such as soap.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump-
ers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 214).
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera and 360° Camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 254).
R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the camera lens.
R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for
Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and a er washing the vehicle.
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Trailer hitch R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch
manufacturer's operator manual.
R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for example, with a wire brush.
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
R A er cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
% Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operator manual.

Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products
containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Maintenance and care 341

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch o the display and let it cool down.
R Clean the surface carefully with a micro bre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD).
R Do not use any other agents.
Head-up display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth.
R Do not use cleaning agents.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials.

R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim.
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a micro bre cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-
ishes or waxes.
Roof lining R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA
* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel

cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth.

342 Maintenance and care
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
% Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discolouration on the leather.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth and 1%
soapy water and allow to dry.

Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door.
# Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest.
% There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.

3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
R the re ective strips are damaged or dirty
R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
R the uorescence has faded

Breakdown assistance 343
Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
# Remove warning triangle 2.

344 Breakdown assistance

Setting up the warning triangle

First-aid kit (so -sided) overview

Removing the re extinguisher

# Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
# Always store and secure the re extinguisher in the bracket.
# Do not remove the re extinguisher while driving.

First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is on the le or right in the boot, depending on the vehicle version.

# Le -hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards. # Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 down-
wards. # Remove re extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre Notes on at tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tyre
A at tyre severely a ects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Breakdown assistance 345

Tyres without run- at characteristics:
# Do not drive with a at tyre.
# Change the at tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Tyres with run- at characteristics:
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres).
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres) (/ page 345).
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 347).

R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 305).
R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 375).
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle. # Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of the MOExtended tyres. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R banging noise

346 Breakdown assistance
R vehicle vibration
R smoke which smells like rubber
R continuous ESP® intervention
R cracks in the tyre sidewalls
# A er driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a quali ed specialist workshop with regard to their further use.
# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre a ected must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:
R Check the tyre for damage.
R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode a er the pressure loss warning:

Load condition

Driving distance possible in emergency mode

Partially laden

80 km

Fully laden

30 km

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot oor.
1 Tyre sealant bottle 2 Tyre in ation compressor Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the boot oor. % You can nd information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre in ation compressor: R LK2 ­ 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre in ation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply: R Emissions sound pressure level
LPA 83 dB (A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A)
The tyre in ation compressor is maintenancefree. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements: R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre in ation compres-
sor (/ page 346)
R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C.

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:
R there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned)
R the wheel rims have been damaged
R a er journeys with very low tyre pressure or with at tyres
# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.

Breakdown assistance 347
Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:
# Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.
# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

348 Breakdown assistance
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre in ation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have
entered the tyre.

# A x part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision.
# A x part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre in ation compressor.

# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre.
# Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7.
# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Switch on the tyre in ation compressor using On/O switch 3. The tyre is in ated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch o the tyre in ation compressor during this phase!

Breakdown assistance 349

# Let the tyre in ation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.
If, a er ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor.
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose.
# Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

# Pump up the tyre again. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not attained a er the speci ed time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
If, a er ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor.
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit
with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

350 Breakdown assistance

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre in ation compressor.
# Pull away immediately.
# Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre in ation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will nd a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side. # To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the
tyre in ation compressor.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre in ation compressor. The lling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
# Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on.
# Always have work on the battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 215)
R Further information on ESP® (/ page 216)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz.

Breakdown assistance 351

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.
# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid o thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
All vehicles
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery.

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

352 Breakdown assistance
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.

Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual.

Fire, naked ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
Wear safety glasses.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery
charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a quali ed specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
All vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger without a restriction of the maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics can be damaged.
# Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to hydrogen gas igniting
If, when charging a battery, there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting.
# Take care that the positive clamp connected to a battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery clamps described.

# Take care to only connect battery terminals of identical polarity when receiving starting assistance.
# Observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads when receiving starting assistance.
# Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases
An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during charging and starting assistance.
# Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
# Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
# Do not stand over the battery.

Breakdown assistance 353

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.
# Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
All vehicles
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:
R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a su cient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal

354 Breakdown assistance

parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.
R The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
R Keep away from re and naked ames.
R Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:
R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:
R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R The vehicles must not touch.

R Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position j. R Vehicles with manual transmission: the trans-
mission is in neutral. R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are
switched o . R The bonnet is open.

Example: engine compartment
# Slide cover 1 of POSITIVE contact 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.
# Connect POSITIVE contact 2 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always

Breakdown assistance 355

begin with POSITIVE contact 2 on your own vehicle rst.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
# Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery rst.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
# During the charging process: start the charging process.
# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
# During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:
# First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point 3 and the negative terminal

of the donor battery, then POSITIVE contact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle rst.
# A er removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover 1 of POSITIVE contact 2.
Plug-in hybrid: if your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 350).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:
R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the speci c vehicle requirements.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technology battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, MercedesBenz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow ttings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.
R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.
Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
R Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

356 Breakdown assistance
Tow-starting or towing away Permitted towing methods (non plug-in hybrid) Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing method

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, you will not be able to steer the vehicle.
# When towing with a tow rope or tow bar, always switch on the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Vehicles with manual transmission
Vehicles with automatic transmission
4MATIC vehicles

Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h

Front axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
No

Rear axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
No

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Overview of permitted towing methods (plug-in hybrid) Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing method

For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Breakdown assistance 357
Observe the information on towing and transporting the vehicle in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Plug-in hybrid vehicles

Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h

Front axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h

Rear axle raised
Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h The steering wheel must be xed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock.

358 Breakdown assistance

In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted:
R the multifunction display is not working
or R the á Towing not permitted See Owner's
Manual display message appears
Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone despite the display message or the display not working.
It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 356).
# Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 357).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged:
R the vehicle cannot be started
R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or j.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 359). A towing vehicle with li ing equipment is required for vehicle transportation.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
# A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:
R the towing eye may become detached.
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 386).
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the transmission otherwise automatically shi s to position j.
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 361).
# Fasten the towing device.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 88).
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate tow-away protection
(/ page 102).
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 239).
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi to position i.

# Vehicles with manual transmission: shi to neutral i.
# Release the electric parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:
R the vehicle is switched o .
R the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
R the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is towed away, signi cantly more e ort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.
# Use a tow bar.
# Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

Breakdown assistance 359
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
Hybrid vehicles: transportation of vehicles should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. # Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 358). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye
in order to load the vehicle.
% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi the automatic transmission to position i.

360 Breakdown assistance

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shi to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 354).
# Vehicles with manual transmission: shi to neutral.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi the automatic transmission to position j.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: engage rst or reverse gear.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid.
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h when transporting.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly
# A er loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Towing eye storage location The towing eye is located in the stowage space under the boot oor. Fitting and removing the towing eye
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.
# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.
# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Breakdown assistance 361
Tow-starting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started.
# Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started.
Vehicles with manual transmission # Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 358). # If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust
system to cool down. # Switch on the ignition. # Engage second gear. # Release the electric parking brake.

362 Breakdown assistance
# Tow-start the vehicle while the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
# Slowly release the clutch pedal. # Immediately shi to neutral if the engine
starts. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c
conditions. # Remove the tow bar. # Remove the towing eye. # Have the vehicle checked at a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a re.

# Always replace faulty fuses with specied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their functionality may be signi cantly impaired.
# Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 363).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.
# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R All electrical consumers are switched o .
R The vehicle is switched o .
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the le -hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 363)

R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 363)
R Fuse box in the centre of the boot (/ page 364)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment
Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 362).
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before opening the engine bonnet.

# Open the bonnet.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 1. # Press clamps 2 and li the fuse box lid up
and out.

Breakdown assistance 363
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned correctly
in the lid. # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps 2 engage. # Tighten screws 1. # Close the bonnet.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 362).

364 Breakdown assistance Opening

Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 362). # Open the boot oor .

# Li carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.
Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws 2. # Fold back the carpet.

Fuse box 1 is located in the centre underneath the boot oor.

Wheels and tyres 365

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. # Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insu cient tyre tread
Insu cient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o road:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 366).

R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly tted snow chains
If you have tted snow chains to the rear wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never t snow chains on the rear
wheels. # Only t snow chains on the front wheels
in pairs.

366 Wheels and tyres
* NOTE Damage to vehicle body or suspension components caused by tted snow chains
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you t snow chains on the rear wheels, you can damage vehicle body or suspension components. # On 4MATIC vehicles, only t snow chains
on the front wheels.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from tted snow chains
If snow chains are tted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before tting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
R If snow chains are tted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are tted.
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 226).
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 218). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient or excessive tyre pressure
Underin ated or overin ated tyres pose in particular the following risks:
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly:
R monthly
R when the load changes
R before embarking on a longer journey

R if operating conditions change, e.g. o road driving
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting. # Examine the tyres for foreign objects. # Check whether the tyre has a puncture
or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

Wheels and tyres 367

Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory- tted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel ller ap (/ page 367).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer.
Notes on trailer operation Always in ate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel ller ap.
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

368 Wheels and tyres
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition.
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 368).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 459) or the h

warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 483).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 369).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R incorrect reference values were taught in
R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
R there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres One of the following displays appears: R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of
the individual wheels:
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving

Wheels and tyres 369

R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
# Compare the tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 367). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres (/ page 366).
% The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system
Requirements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 366).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.

R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly tted.
On-board computer:
4 Service 5 Tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the Instrument Display.
# To restart, press Touch Control on the le hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display.
Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 366)

Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function of the tyre pressure loss warning system The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:
R incorrect reference values were taught in
R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
R an even pressure loss on more than one tyre occurs
The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations:
R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
R driving with snow chains
R when adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration
R driving with a very heavy or large trailer
R driving with a high load

370 Wheels and tyres
The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 366)
R Display messages about the tyres (/ page 459)
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system
Requirements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all wheels.
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly tted.

On-board computer:
4 Service 5 Tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart message is shown in the display.
# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the display.
# Select Yes.
# To con rm restart, press Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the display.
A er you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 366)

Wheel change Notes on selecting, tting and replacing tyres
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tyres with
those that ful l the speci cations of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type

For tyres, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the speci ed tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and sizes
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run- at tyres only for certain wheels)
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)
Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

Wheels and tyres 371
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. # Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.

372 Wheels and tyres
# Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes
Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre- tting tools
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel. If tyre- tting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged.

# Tyre- tting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.
# Always have tyres changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. # At temperatures below 7 °C use i
M+S tyres.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and enquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.
# Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
# Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C.
# Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.
Observe the following when selecting, tting and replacing tyres:
R Country-speci c requirements for tyre approval that de ne a speci c tyre type for your vehicle.

R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial.
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
R Only t wheels of the same size on one axle (le and right).
It is only permissible to t a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
R Do not make any modi cations to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all tted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
R At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all wheels.

Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres tted.
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the rst 100 km.
R Replace the tyres a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run- at characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tyres that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 226).

Wheels and tyres 373
For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 366) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 367) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 380)
Notes on interchanging wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged. # Only interchange the front and rear
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.

374 Wheels and tyres

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have di erent dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er:
R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 375).

Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack

R Chock
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker a xed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the boot.
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located at other positions in the boot.

The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope.

Wheels and tyres 375

R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyrechange tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: engage rst or reverse gear.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi to position j.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 375).
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 376).

Removing and tting the wheel trim/hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 375). Wheel trim The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts on vehicles with steel wheels. Before unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel trim.
# To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim.

376 Wheels and tyres

Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To t: make sure that the centre cover of the
hub cap is turned anti-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover
clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Aluminium hub cap
# To remove: position socket 2 from the tyrechange tool kit on hub cap 1.
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.

# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
# To t: follow the instructions above in reverse order.
% Speci ed tightening torque: 25 Nm.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 375).
Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.

R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
R Never lie under the vehicle.
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
R Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.

Position of jack support points
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of

Wheels and tyres 377
the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
ing up the vehicle at the jack support points.
# Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

378 Wheels and tyres
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1.
% If there is a total loss of pressure in a tyre, it may be possible that the jack cannot be positioned at jack support point 1. In this case, unload the vehicle.

# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 378).
Removing a wheel
Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 376).

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

# Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.
# Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel
Requirements: R The wheel to be changed is removed and the
centring pin is screwed in (/ page 378).
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Wheels and tyres 379

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 370).
For tyres with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when tting. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
tring pin and push it on.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 379).
Lowering the vehicle a er a wheel change
Requirements: R The new wheel has been tted (/ page 379).
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 370).

380 Wheels and tyres
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 130 Nm.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 370).
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 369).

Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.
To prevent hazardous situations:
# Drive carefully.
# Never t more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y.
# Do not deactivate ESP®.
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work-

Wheels and tyres 381

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
Observe the following notes on tting an emergency spare wheel:
R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
R Do not t the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
% The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the system

again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is tted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 366)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 367)
R Notes on tting tyres (/ page 370)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 375)

In ating the emergency spare wheel
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tyre in ation compressor.
# Remove the sticker with the label 80 km/h from the tyre in ation compressor housing and a x it to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision.
# Remove the tyre in ation compressor from the stowage well under the boot oor (/ page 346).

382 Wheels and tyres

# Pull ller hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# Insert plug 7 of ller hose 1 in the socket on the tyre in ation compressor and then turn it until plug 7 engages.
# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emergency spare wheel.
# Screw union nut 2 of ller hose 1 onto the valve.
# Make sure on and o switch 4 of the tyre in ation compressor is set to 0.
# Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle.
R Cigarette lighter socket

R 12 V socket (/ page 125)
R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Owner's Manual
R Observe the notes on sockets (/ page 125).
# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply (/ page 159).
# Press on and o switch 4 on the tyre in ation compressor to I. The tyre in ation compressor is switched on. The tyre is in ated. The tyre pressure is shown on manometer 5.
# Pump the tyre to the speci ed tyre pressure.
% The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
# When the speci ed tyre pressure has been reached, press on and o switch 4 on the tyre in ation compressor to 0. The tyre in ation compressor is switched o .
# Press the start/stop button to switch o the power supply.
# If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci ed pressure, press pressure release valve button

6 until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.
# Unscrew union nut 2 of ller hose 1 from the valve.
# Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.
# Stow ller hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower section of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# Stow the tyre in ation compressor in the vehicle.

Notes on technical data
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can nd vehiclespeci c vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle.

On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine electronics
* NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. # Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Two-way radios
Notes on tting two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retro tted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Technical data 383
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior aerial. R The exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is
not a low-re ection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-re ection exterior aerial t-
ted at a quali ed specialist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the lowre ection exterior aerial.

384 Technical data
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved aerial positions.

1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wings 4 Boot lid
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, tting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.

On the rear wings, it is recommended that you t the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road.
Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles ­ "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when tting.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band

Maximum transmission output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm frequency band 400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)

10 W

Technical data 385

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in
the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G
Regulatory radio identi cation and notes Regulatory radio identi cation of small components
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig-

ital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Regulatory radio identi cation ­ Indonesia
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation ­ Indonesia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information
about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components".
Further component-speci c information
Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further componentspeci c information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

386 Technical data
Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identi cation plate

Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN

Vehicle identi cation plate (example: all other countries)
1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)

Technical data 387

5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for speci c countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

VIN and engine number

Operating uids Notes on operating uids
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) stamped
into the crossmember 3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windscreen
Only for certain countries: the VIN as a label at the lower edge of windscreen 3 is only available in some countries. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health
Operating uids may be poisonous and harmful to your health.
# Observe the text on the original containers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids.
# Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers.
# Always keep children away from operating uids.

388 Technical data
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environment. # Dispose of operating uids in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Operating uids include the following: R fuels R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas a er-
treatment R lubricants R coolant R brake uid R windscreen washer uid R climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identi ed by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating uids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-
ating Fluids by entering the designation - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R At a quali ed specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refuelling, switch o
the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary heater.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapour.
# Keep children away from fuel.
# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
# Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types: R unleaded petrol R E85 fuel R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identi ed by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel ller ap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may di er from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap.
Fuel
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a petrol engine Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 387).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.
# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent speci cation.
Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
# See the information label in fuel ller ap for other compatible fuels .
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R Diesel
R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with additives containing metal

Technical data 389 If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:
1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by volume
2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by volume
The compatibility indications for fuel on the vehicle according to the European standard EN 16942

390 Technical data

can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe.
If the available fuel is not su ciently low in sulphur, this can produce unpleasant odours.
The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap.
If the recommended fuel is not available, you may also temporarily use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop.
Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with petrol engine) Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 387).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.
# Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brandname fuels with additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not have su cient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a diesel engine
General notes Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 387).

& WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using petrol in diesel
engines. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Vehicles with a diesel particulate lter: # Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.
Vehicle without diesel particulate lter:

# Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Petrol R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
oil R Para n or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indication for fuel applies to your vehicle:

Technical data 391

1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by volume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)
According to European standard EN 16942 you can nd the compatibility indications at the following locations:
R On the vehicle on the information label in the fuel ller ap (/ page 182)
R On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe
Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.

Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When rst refuelling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be lled as usual when next refuelling.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop.
Tank content and fuel reserve Not for plug-in hybrid:
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.

392 Technical data

Fuel tank total capacity Model

CLA 220 d CLA 250

43.0 litres or
51.0 litres

CLA 200 4MATIC CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC CLA 250 4MATIC

51.0 litres

All other models

43.0 litres

Reserve fuel tank Model

All models

5.0 litres

Total capacity of fuel tank (plug-in hybrid)

Model

Total capacity

CLA 250 e

35.0 litres

Fuel tank reserve (plug-in hybrid)

Model

of which reserve fuel

CLA 250 e

5.0 litres

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on AdBlue® Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 387).
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines.
It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or one that does not comply with the speci cations of these operator's manual.
* NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxi cation agents.

# Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
# Do not dilute AdBlue® with water. # Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®
Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®: R increased emission values R damage to the catalytic converter R NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment malfunc-
tions
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
AdBlue® residues crystallise a er a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible. When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale

any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.

AdBlue® capacity

Total capacity of AdBlue® tank

Model

Total capacity

All models

23.8 litres

AdBlue® consumption The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption gures under day-to-day operating conditions may di er from the consumption gures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before making journeys outside of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of Europe, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

AdBlue® range and ll level The AdBlue® ll level and range can be displayed via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the range currently displayed in the on-board computer. The information supplied in the operator's manual regarding the reserve quantity at the rst display warning and on the minimum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 387).

Technical data 393
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
# Do not use engine oils or oil lters other than those which meet the speci cations necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed a er the
prescribed intervals.

394 Technical data

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Petrol engines: for certain countries, di erent engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals. Further information on di erent engine oils can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil Not for plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil speci cations (petrol engines)

Model

MB-Freigabe or MBApproval

All models

229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*,
229.72

Engine oil speci cations (diesel engines)

Model

MB-Freigabe or MBApproval

All models

229.52, 229.61, 229.71*, 229.72

* recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes.
% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only. Vehicles with a petrol engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 Vehicles with a diesel engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
Not for plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil lling capacity Model

Capacity

CLA 180, (manual and automatic transmission)
CLA 200, (manual and automatic transmission)
CLA 200 4MATIC

5.1 litres

CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC

5.5 litres

All other models

6.8 litres

The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil lter.

Engine oil speci cation (plug-in hybrid)

Model

MB-Freigabe or MBApproval

CLA 250 e

229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*,
229.72

* recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes.
% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of engine oils with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.31 or ACEA C3 once only.

Engine oil capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model

Capacity

CLA 250 e

4.5 litres

The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil lter.
Notes on brake uid
Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 387).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system
The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking e ect. # Have the brake uid renewed at the
speci ed intervals.
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a qualied specialist workshop. Only use a brake uid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Technical data 395
Coolant
Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 387).
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the ller opening. # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant
# Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.

396 Technical data
Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for
Operating Fluids 320.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R At a quali ed specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-
Benz. # Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids 320.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
to about -37°C) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45°C)
Notes on windscreen washer uid
Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 387).
& WARNING  Risk of re and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windscreen washer uids which
are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer uids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer uids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the ll level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer uid: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all year round.

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: R tyres R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Vehicle dimensions All models

Vehicle length

4688 mm

Vehicle width including outside 1999 mm mirrors

All models

Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors

1830 mm

Vehicle height

1444 mm

Wheelbase

2729 mm

Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybrid) CLA 250 e

Vehicle length

4688 mm

Vehicle width including outside 1999 mm mirrors

Vehicle width excluding outside 1830 mm mirrors

Vehicle height

1450 mm

Wheelbase

2729 mm

Technical data 397

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the specied vehicle data:
R Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.
R Vehicle-speci c weight information can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 386).

Roof load Model

Maximum roof load

All models

100 kg

High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Notes on the power supply for vehicles with a high-voltage battery In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019 vehicle identi ers are located on the vehicle in the following places:
R On the inside of the socket ap
R On the charging cable connector

398 Technical data

In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy supply identi ers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations where the charging station identi er corresponds to the vehicle identi er. For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 188).
1 Supply type: AC Standard: EN 62196-2 Style: type 2 Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 480 V RMS

2 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Style: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
3 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Style: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Maximum battery capacity and charging times
CLA 250 e (Coupé and Shooting Brake)

Type

Lithium-ion

Maximum energy content

15.6 kWh

Range in electric-only mode

CLA 250 e (Coupé and Shooting Brake)

Charge time ­ mode 4
with approx. 22 kW charging capacity

Approx. 25 min

Charge time ­ mode 3 with 7.4 kW charging capacity

Approx. 1 h 45 min

Charge time ­ mode 2 with 3.7 kW charging capacity

Approx. 3 h 15 min

Charge time ­ mode 2 with 2.3 kW charging capacity

Approx. 5 h 30 min

Charge time ­ mode 2 with 1.8 kW charging capacity

Approx. 7 h 30 min

Charging times ­ modes 2 and 3 apply to AC charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content. Charging time ­ mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content.

The time taken to charge the battery depends on the charge status of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket ap (/ page 188).

Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch
Modi cations to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retro tting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is speci ed in your vehicle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
1 Fastening points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line

Technical data 399

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

Overhang dimension length

Model

2 Overhang dimension

All models

1153 mm

Towing capacity
% The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. The values for the trailer load, braked apply with a minimum start-o gradeability of 12%.
Not for plug-in hybrid:

400 Technical data
Towing capacity, braked Model
CLA 180 CLA 180 d
CLA 200 4MATIC CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC CLA 250 4MATIC
All other models
Towing capacity, unbraked Model
CLA 180, manual transmission
CLA 180, automatic transmission CLA 200, manual transmission

1400 kg 1800 kg
1600 kg
705 kg 710 kg

Model

CLA 200, automatic transmission

715 kg

CLA 250

745 kg

All other models

750 kg

Trailer load, braked (plug-in hybrid) Model

CLA 250 e

1600 kg

Trailer load, unbraked (plug-in hybrid) Model

CLA 250 e

750 kg

Maximum tongue weight and load capacity
* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

* NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.
# Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 268).

Tongue weight Model

Maximum tongue weight

All models

80 kg

Load capacity
All models
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin

Maximum load 75 kg
100 kg

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation) Not for plug-in hybrid:

Trailer operation axle load Model
CLA 180, manual transmission CLA 200, (manual and automatic transmission)
CLA 180, automatic transmission
CLA 180 d, manual transmission CLA 200 d, manual transmission
CLA 200 4MATIC
CLA 220 d
CLA 250
CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC
All other models

Axle load 1055 kg
1050 kg 1085 kg
1090 kg 1070 kg 1040 kg 1115 kg 1080 kg

Technical data 401

Axle load trailer operation (plug-in hybrid)

Model

Axle load

CLA 250 e

1215 kg

402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Introduction
Information about display messages Display messages appear on the instrument display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simpli ed in the Owner's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.
For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:
R Õ Further information
R ¨ Hide display message
With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on

the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back button P or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been recti ed.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer:
4 Service 5 1 message
If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the instrument display.
# Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
# To exit the message memory: press the back button P.

Occupant safety
Display messages
6
Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 47).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 47).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405

Display messages
6
Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 47).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual

* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING  Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 57). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 57). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The PRESAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Key
Display messages
Á
Replace key
Á
Change key batteries

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the key replaced.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The key battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 84).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407

408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Á
Key not detected (white display message)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The key is currently undetected. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 160).

Á
Key not detected (red display message)

* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

Á

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 160).
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key. # Wait until processing is complete.

Key being initialised Please wait

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409

Display messages
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Key detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 160).

Lights
Display messages
:
Left dipped beam (example)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
or # Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself (/ page 140). % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the light are faulty.

410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
:
Malfunction See Owner's Manual
:

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 362).
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Automatic driving lights inoperative
:

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Light System inoperative

Display messages
:
Switch on headlamps
:
Switch off lights
:
Intelligent Light System inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position.

* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 135).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.
# Drive on

412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 136). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Until then, operate the high beam manually.
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413

Climate control
Display messages
&
inoperative See Owner's Man.
&
inoperative Battery low

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning. # When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt. # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself o . # Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a su cient charge level again.

414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
&
inoperative Refuel vehicle
&
inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete
&
inoperative Charge HV battery

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on. # Refuel the vehicle.
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge.
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery.

Display messages
&
Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again after engine start
&
Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HVbattery low

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched o . # Start the vehicle for ten seconds. Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery. When the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.

416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Hybrid system
Display messages
u

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 357).

Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual
ò
Acoustic presence indicator inoperative
è

* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users. # Drive with particular care. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected. # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected
Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual

* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket. # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that:

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417

Display messages
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault
Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual
Only electric drive available Power limited

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the charging station or the emergency call numbers.
* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised. # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. or # Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
* The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched o . The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode.

418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
"Electric" drive program currently unavailable Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual
Û
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Refuel immediately. Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a driving distance of 50 km.
If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery is not su cient for the Electric drive program. Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 188).
* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419

Display messages
Û
Malfunction
Û

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* There is a serious malfunction if the display message and warning tone are repeated at short intervals. You must stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions because the drive system is automatically deactivated. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch o the vehicle and consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop Without changing gear, consult workshop
Without starting engine again, consult workshop

* The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction. If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched o in park position j or neutral i. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
d
Malfunction
d
Stop Switch engine off
d
Performance severely limited

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not continue driving. # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures. The output is severely restricted. Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421

Display messages
6
Please wait Depressurising tank
6
Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling
6
Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel ller ap is opened. The pressure reduction can take up to 15 minutes.
* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel ller ap opens.
* Vehicles with petrol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Vehicle

Display messages
d
Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

ï
Check trailer hitch lock (white display message)

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 265). # When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Display messages
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational. # Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. # If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 265). # Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage. # If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 265). # Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. # Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R malfunctions in the power supply R signal interference
# Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Head-up display inoperative
Ù
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The head-up display has an internal error.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425

Display messages
Ù
Steering malfunction See Owner's Manual
û
Before starting the engine, turn the steering wheel. Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering. # Switch o the vehicle. # To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the le and right. # Switch on the vehicle again.
* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
C

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.

M N

* The bonnet is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Close the bonnet. * The boot lid is open.
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the boot lid. # Never drive with the boot lid open.

Display messages
Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction
¥
Top up washer fluid Wiper malfunctioning

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Close the boot lid.
* The anti-the alarm system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Top up the washer uid (/ page 333).
* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine
Display messages To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times.
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual
+
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 160).
* The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 333). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages
ÿ
Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off
ÿ

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
æ
Reserve fuel level
!
Clean the fuel filter
¸
Replace air cleaner
Drive system Malfunction Visit workshop
Drive system Malfunction Stop Switch engine off

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel lter is dirty or the water in the fuel lter needs to be drained. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air lter is dirty and must be replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the engine. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431

Transmission

Display messages Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position
To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine
Apply brake to select D or R
Apply brake to select R

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position.
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.
* You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal.

432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling
Without changing gear, consult workshop
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop Transmission Malfunction Stop

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Select transmission position k.
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433

Display messages
Transmission Malfunction
d
Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care Parking lock inoperative Apply the parking brake
Teaching in transmission Operate selector lever Brake for XX seconds Risk of vehicle rolling

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears. # Let the transmission cool down. # If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away. # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed. The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process. # Switch on the vehicle.

434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual Teaching in transmission complete Transmission Malfunction Visit workshop Depress clutch fully to start engine
Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away until the warning goes out

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i.
* The transmission position cannot be reliably identi ed. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* You have attempted to start the vehicle without depressing the clutch pedal. # Depress the clutch pedal and then start the vehicle.
* The vehicle has stalled while the vehicle was pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly. # Depress the clutch pedal again. The vehicle will start automatically. # Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.
* The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances. # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and tra c conditions and leave the vehicle running. The clutch will cool more quickly when the vehicle is running.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435

Display messages
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
or # If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not let the clutch
drag. The clutch will cool while the vehicle is in motion. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message will disappear.
* The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
* Vehicles with manual transmission: There is a fault with the auxiliary battery. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes
Display messages
!
Parking brake See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 211).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 211). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 211). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Display messages

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 211).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
To apply: # Switch o the vehicle.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
!
Release parking brake

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 211).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 211).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 211). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 212).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Display messages
!
Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake Risk of vehicle rolling away Parking brake not applied See Owner's Manual
J
Brake immediately

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle.
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric parking brake has not been applied and you open the driver's door. # Apply the electric parking brake.
* Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the horn will become louder. You cannot start the vehicle system. # Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the display message disappears. You cannot start the vehicle system again.

440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
J
Check brake fluid level
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake uid.
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving systems
Display messages
ë
Off

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 219).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages
é

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!
h

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 221). # If necessary, take a break.
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 224).

- - - km/h Cruise control inoperative
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative

* Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Cruise control off
È
- - - km/h Limiter passive
Limiter inoperative
ç
- - - km/h
ç
suspended

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 223). * The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode (/ page 224).
* The limiter is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228).
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 226).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Display messages
ç

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 228).

Off Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Distance Assist inoperative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 226). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Active Distance Assist available again Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist inoperative
ð

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228).
* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only). # Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h

* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Steering Assist inoperative
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops
Beginning emergency stop

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 232). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more.
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 234). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering

446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Ø
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist inoperative
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 232). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.
* Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on
* Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 243). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Display messages
Blind Spot Assist inoperative
Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 243). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 246). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages
¸ Ã ç Ä
temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 214). # Restart the vehicle.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
á Ã Ä Ø Ô
temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular.
% This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 214). # Restart the vehicle.

Display messages
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving safety systems
Display messages
! ÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.

Display messages
! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages
T ! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.

456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages
G
Inoperative

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Display messages
Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 38). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Battery Display messages
#
12 V battery See Owner's Manual
#
See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle is o and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. # Drive for 30­60 minutes. or # Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 354).
* If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages
#
Stop vehicle Leave engine running

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the vehicle running # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor Display messages Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable
Tyre press. monitor inoperative

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on.
* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors
h
Wheel sensor(s) missing
h
Check tyre(s)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tyre. # Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyre pressure (/ page 366) and the tyres.

Display messages
h
Rectify tyre pressure
h
Warning tyre defect

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the di erence in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 369).
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre R The tyres can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tyre. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre. # Observe the notes on at tyres.
Notes in the event of a at tyre (/ page 345). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyres.

462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Tyre(s) overheated
Reduce speed

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
* At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Tyre pressure loss warning system

Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signi cant loss of pressure.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Display messages
Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyre pressure (/ page 366) and the tyres. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 369). * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 369). * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Exhaust gas a ertreatment
Display messages
Ú

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. # Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 186).

Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual
Ú

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance a er the remaining distance displayed has been covered. # Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 186).

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual
Ú
XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. A er the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 186).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Display messages
Ú
XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.
¯

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 186). # Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. # Start the vehicle.
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual
¯
AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
¯
AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km
¯

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. A er the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible

Engine oil
Display messages
5
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling
5
Engine oil level Reduce oil level
5
Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. # When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 331). Notes on engine oil (/ page 393). * The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages
5
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine
5
Engine oil level cannot be measured

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Switch o the vehicle. # Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 331). # Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 393).
* The oil pressure is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient oil pressure # Avoid driving with insu cient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or during a journey.
Standard instrument display

Widescreen cockpit instrument display

Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may di er from the example shown.

Indicator and warning lamps:

6

Restraint system (/ page 470)

ü

Seat belt (/ page 470)

_

Reduced power (/ page 472)

Ú

System error (/ page 472)

#

Electrical fault (/ page 472)

ï

Trailer hitch (/ page 473)

Ù

Power steering (/ page 473)

ÿ
; % # æ
!
!
J J L Ó ê ! ÷ å

Vehicles with a widescreen cockpit: coolant temperature (/ page 474) Engine diagnostics (/ page 474) Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow Electrical fault (/ page 474) Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location indicator (/ page 474) Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 478) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 478) Brakes (yellow) (/ page 478) Brakes (red) (/ page 478) Distance warning (/ page 480) Active Brake Assist (/ page 480) Active Brake Assist (/ page 480) ABS (/ page 481) ESP® (/ page 481) ESP® OFF (/ page 481)

470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

h

Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 483)

T

Standing lights (/ page 130)

L

Low beam (/ page 130)

K

High beam (/ page 132)

#! Turn signal lights (/ page 132)

R

Rear fog light (/ page 130)

Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp
6
Restraint system warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 47).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:

Warning/indicator lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp ashes

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the instrument display. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 51). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp lights up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 51).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Hybrid system
Warning/indicator lamp
_
Reduced warning lamp power
Ú
System error warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ. There is a malfunction in the drive system. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Warning/indicator lamp
#
Electrical fault warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Ù
Power steering warning lamp (red)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp
ï
Trailer tow hitch warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Engine
Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (red)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty

Warning/indicator lamp

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 333).

476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)
;
Engine diagnosis warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry. # Start the engine three to four times a er refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Warning/indicator lamp
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
æ
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp
!
Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)
!

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Warning/indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (red)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake uid.

480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp
L
Warning lamp for distance warning function
Ó
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê
Active Brake Assist warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 235). * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 235).

Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp ashes

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 216). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

å
ESP® OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

Warning/indicator lamp

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 216).

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

Index 485

1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC Function................................................ 181
12 V battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
12 V socket see Socket (12 V)
115 V socket see Socket (115 V)
360° Camera Care...................................................... 339 Function................................................ 251 Opening the camera cover (reversing camera)................................................. 254 Selecting a view..................................... 254 Switching automatic operation on/o (reversing camera)................................. 254
A
A/C function Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 148

Activating/deactivating (operating unit)....................................................... 148
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................... 215
Acceleration see Kickdown
Accident and Breakdown Management Mercedes me connect........................... 310
Acoustic locking veri cation signal Activating/deactivating............................ 83
Acoustic presence indicator (sound generator)
Notes..................................................... 156
Acoustic Vehicle Indication Sound generator.................................... 156
Active Blind Spot Assist Brake application................................... 245 Function................................................ 243 System limitations.................................. 243 Trailer operation..................................... 245
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation.............................................. 328 Resetting............................................... 328

Active Brake Assist Function/notes...................................... 235 Setting................................................... 239
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 234 Calling up a speed................................. 228 Function................................................ 226 Increasing/decreasing speed................. 228 Maximum design speed.......................... 172 Route-based speed adaptation............... 231 Selecting............................................... 228 Storing a speed...................................... 228 Switching o /deactivating..................... 228 Switching on/activating......................... 228 System limitations.................................. 226
Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 234
Active headlamps......................................... 133
Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 248 Activating/deactivating the warning....... 248 Function................................................ 246 Setting the sensitivity............................. 248 System limits......................................... 246 Trailer operation..................................... 246

486 Index

Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 262 Function................................................ 259 Parking.................................................. 260 System limitations.................................. 259
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... 230 Function................................................ 230
Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 234 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 234 Function................................................ 232 System limits......................................... 232
Adaptive brake lights.................................... 220
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 136 Function................................................ 135
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function................................................ 136 Switching on/o .................................... 137

AdBlue® Additives................................................ 392 Capacity................................................ 393 Notes..................................................... 186 Purity..................................................... 392 Topping up............................................. 186
Additional door lock....................................... 85
Additives AdBlue®................................................. 392 Engine oil............................................... 393 Fuel....................................................... 390
Additives (AdBlue®) see AdBlue®
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
Adjusting the headlamp range...................... 131
A er-sales service see ASSYST PLUS
Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 148

Air distribution Setting................................................... 147 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 149
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tyre pressure
Air vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 154 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 155
Air vents see Air vents
Air-conditioning system see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode (with ne particle pre lter).......................................... 149
Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 334
Airbag Activation................................................ 47 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 53 Installation locations................................ 53 Knee airbag............................................. 53

Index 487

Overview.................................................. 53 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 57 Protection................................................ 54 Reduced protection.................................. 55 Side airbag.............................................. 53 Window airbag......................................... 53
Air ow Setting................................................... 147
Alarm system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
All-wheel drive see 4MATIC
Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 138
Android Auto see Smartphone integration
Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 81
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains

Anti-the protection Additional door lock................................. 85 Immobiliser............................................ 101
Anti-the protection see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 328 Displaying the service due date.............. 327 Function/notes...................................... 327 Regular maintenance work..................... 327 Special service requirements................. 327
ATA (anti-the alarm system) Deactivating the alarm........................... 102 Function................................................ 101 Interior protection function..................... 103

Priming/deactivating interior protection........................................................ 103 Priming/deactivating tow-away protection................................................... 102 Tow-away protection function................. 102
ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 221 Setting................................................... 223 System limitations.................................. 221
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorised workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop
Automatic car wash mode Activating............................................... 336
Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 56
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights................................ 131
Automatic engine start see ECO start/stop function

488 Index

Automatic engine stop see ECO start/stop function
Automatic front passenger airbag shuto PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 57
Automatic measures a er an accident............ 61
Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating.......................... 146
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 177 Drive programs...................................... 172 DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... 172 Engaging drive position.......................... 179 Engaging reverse gear............................ 178 Kickdown............................................... 180 Manual gear changing............................ 179 Selecting park position........................... 178 Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ 179 Transmission position display................. 177 Transmission positions........................... 177
Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem)
Axle load Permissible............................................ 386 Trailer operation..................................... 401

B
Ball neck Folding out/in........................................ 265
BAS (Brake Assist System)........................... 216
Battery see High-voltage battery
Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical system)
see High-voltage battery
Battery (key) Replacing................................................. 84
Battery (vehicle) Charging (Remote Online)...................... 161 Notes..................................................... 350 Notes (starting assistance and charging)........................................................ 352
Battery operation......................................... 156
Belt see Seat belt
Bicycle rack Load capacity........................................ 400 Trailer operation..................................... 268

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 246 Function................................................ 243 System limitations.................................. 243
Blower see Climate control
BlueTEC see AdBlue®
Bonnet Function (active bonnet)......................... 328 Opening/closing.................................... 329 Resetting (active bonnet)........................ 328
Boot lid Closing.................................................... 91 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 92 Opening................................................... 90
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake uid Notes..................................................... 395
Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 218

Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 215 Active Brake Assist................................. 235 Adaptive brake lights.............................. 220 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 216 Driving tips............................................ 163 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 218 HOLD function....................................... 219 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 163 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 162 Post-collision brake.................................. 61 Running-in notes.................................... 162
Brakes see Recuperation
Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown Assistance overview................................. 20 Tow-starting........................................... 361 Towing away.......................................... 358 Transporting the vehicle......................... 359 Wheel change........................................ 375

Breakdown see Flat tyre
Buttons Steering wheel....................................... 273
C
Calls Mercedes me......................................... 305
Camera Information............................................ 214
Camera see 360° Camera see Dashcam see Reversing camera
Car key see Key
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care)............................................ 334
Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings.................... 299
Care 360° camera......................................... 339

Index 489
Air-water duct........................................ 334 Automatic car wash............................... 334 Carpet................................................... 340 Decorative foil........................................ 338 Display................................................... 340 Exterior lighting...................................... 339 Head-up display..................................... 340 High-pressure cleaner............................ 336 Paint...................................................... 337 Plastic trim............................................ 340 Real wood/trim elements...................... 340 Reversing camera.................................. 339 Roof lining............................................. 340 Seat belt................................................ 340 Seat cover............................................. 340 Sensors................................................. 339 Steering wheel....................................... 340 Tailpipes................................................ 339 Trailer hitch............................................ 339 Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery................................................... 339 Washing by hand.................................... 337 Wheels/rims.......................................... 339 Windows................................................ 339 Wiper blades.......................................... 339

490 Index

Carpet (Care)............................................... 340
Changing bulbs Dipped beam......................................... 141 Fitting/removing cover (front wheel arch)...................................................... 140 Main beam............................................. 141 Notes..................................................... 139 Overview................................................ 140 Reversing lights...................................... 141 Turn signal lights (rear)........................... 141
Changing gears Manually................................................ 179
Changing hub caps....................................... 375
Charging Charge level display............................... 205 Charging cable control panel.................. 194 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 200 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 204 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195 Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... 191 Notes - fast charging station (mode 4).... 193 Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... 190

Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ 191 Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... 188 On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... 354 Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... 193 Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3)..................... 197 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 201 Stowing the charging cable.................... 188 USB port................................................ 126
Charging cable Control panel......................................... 194 Stowing................................................. 188
Child safety lock Rear door................................................. 79 Rear side windows................................... 81
Child seat Approval categories................................. 67 Attaching (notes)...................................... 66 Basic instructions.................................... 61 Front passenger seat (notes).................... 77

Front passenger seat (without automatic airbag shuto )................................ 77 ISOFIX/i-Size ( tting)............................... 70 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 62 Recommendations for child restraint systems................................................... 65 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems..................................... 74 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems................................................... 70 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems..................................... 68 Securing on the co-driver seat.................. 78 Securing on the rear seat......................... 75 Top Tether................................................ 72
Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 62 Basic instructions.................................... 61
Chock Storage location..................................... 374
Chock see Chock
City lighting.................................................. 134

Index 491

Cleaning see Care
Cleaning uid see windscreen washer uid
Climate control Activating/deactivating.......................... 148 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system).............. 148 Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (control panel)............. 149 Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 149 Air-recirculation mode (with ne particle pre lter)........................................... 149 Automatic control.................................. 148 Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 148 Demisting the windscreen...................... 147 Demisting windows................................ 149 Front air vents........................................ 154 Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 152 Note...................................................... 147 Pre-entry climate control at departure time....................................................... 150 Pre-entry climate control using the key... 150

Rear air vents......................................... 155 Residual heat......................................... 149 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 148 Setting the air distribution...................... 147 Setting the air ow.................................. 147 Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... 147 Stationary heater/ventilation................. 152 Switching the A/C function on/o (control panel)....................................... 148 Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 147 THERMATIC control panel...................... 147 THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 147 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 95
Co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
Cockpit Overview.............................................. 6, 10
Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 212

Combination switch..................................... 132
Component-speci c information................... 385
Computer see On-board computer
Convenience closing...................................... 96
Convenience opening..................................... 95
Coolant (engine) Level check............................................ 333 Notes..................................................... 395
Cooling see Climate control
Copyright....................................................... 45
Cornering light............................................. 134
Cross tra c (warning) see Manoeuvring assistance
Cross Tra c Alert........................................ 264
Crosswind Assist Function/notes...................................... 217
Cruise control Activating............................................... 224 Buttons.................................................. 224 Calling up a speed................................. 224

492 Index

Deactivating........................................... 224 Function................................................ 223 Maximum design speed.......................... 172 Requirements:....................................... 224 Selecting............................................... 224 Setting a speed...................................... 224 Storing a speed...................................... 224 System limitations.................................. 223
D
Damping adjustment.................................... 248
Dashboard see Cockpit
Dashcam Notes..................................................... 300 Selecting a USB device.......................... 301 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 301
Data acquisition Vehicle..................................................... 42
Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 45
Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 45 Electronic control units............................ 42

Online services........................................ 44 Vehicle..................................................... 42
Deactivating the alarm (ATA)......................... 102
Dealership see Quali ed specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 29 Importer addresses.................................. 36 Jack......................................................... 36 Speci c absorption rate........................... 29 TIREFIT kit................................................ 37 Wireless vehicle components................... 29
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)........... 338
DeNOx agent see AdBlue®
Destination entry Entering a POI or address....................... 296
Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection.................................. 38
Diesel Low outside temperatures...................... 390 Notes..................................................... 390

Digital Owner's Manual.................................. 22
Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system
Dipped beam Changing bulbs...................................... 141
DIRECT SELECT lever Engageing reverse gear.......................... 178 Engaging drive position.......................... 179 Engaging neutral.................................... 178 Engaging park position automatically...... 178 Function................................................ 177 Selecting park position........................... 178
Display (care)............................................... 340
Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... 280 Operating.............................................. 281
Display (on-board computer) Displays on the instrument display......... 276
Display in the windscreen see Head-up display
Display message Calling up (on-board computer).............. 402 Notes..................................................... 402

Display messages ç - - - km/h..................................... 442 È - - - km/h..................................... 442 h - - - km/h..................................... 441 # 12 V battery See Owner's Manual......................................................... 457 ò Acoustic presence indicator inoperative............................................. 416 : Active Light System inoperative..... 410 ¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.................................................. 466 ¯ AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.... 465 ¯ AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible................................... 466 ¯ AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual............................................ 465 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling............................................... 467

é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative..... 441 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!.................................................... 441 : Automatic driving lights inoperative...................................................... 410 Û Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible................ 418 û Before starting the engine, turn the steering wheel.................................. 425 J Brake immediately........................ 439 Á Change key batteries.................... 407 è Charger cable connected.............. 416 J Check brake uid level.................. 440 ï Check trailer hitch lock (white display message).................................... 422 h Check tyre(s)................................ 460 ! Clean the fuel lter....................... 430 ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine o .............................................. 429

Index 493
! currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ 452 ÷ currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ 453 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured....................................................... 468 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level..... 467 5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine o ................................... 467 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch o engine.............................................. 468 ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h......... 451 6 Front le malfunction Consult workshop (example)............................... 404 & inoperative Battery low................. 413 & inoperative Charge HV battery...... 414 & inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete............................... 414 & inoperative Refuel vehicle.............. 414 & inoperative See Owner's Man........ 413

494 Index
! inoperative See Owner's Manual... 453 ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual... 454 T inoperative See Owner's Manual... 455 G Inoperative................................... 456 : Intelligent Light System inoperative........................................................ 411 Á Key being initialised Please wait.... 408 Á Key not detected (red display message)............................................... 408 Á Key not detected (white display message)............................................... 408 : Le dipped beam (example).......... 409 6 Le windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example).................. 405 : Malfunction See Owner's Manual......................................................... 410 Û Malfunction Visit workshop........... 419 d Malfunction.................................. 420 Û Malfunction.................................. 419 ð Maximum speed exceeded............ 444

ç O ................................................ 443 ë O ................................................ 440 ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual.................................................. 436 d Performance severely limited........ 420 6 Please wait Depressurising tank.... 421 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again a er engine start..... 415 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HV-battery low.............. 415 h Rectify tyre pressure..................... 461 Ú Re ll AdBlue See Owner's Manual......................................................... 464 ! Release parking brake................... 438 ¸ Replace air cleaner....................... 430 Á Replace key.................................. 407 æ Reserve fuel level.......................... 430 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop........................................ 403 # See Owner's Manual..................... 457

Ù Steering malfunction Increased physical e ort See Owner's Manual....... 424 Ù Steering malfunction See Owner's Manual............................................ 425 Ù Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual........... 424 d Stop Switch engine o .................. 420 # Stop vehicle Leave engine running....................................................... 459 # Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual......................................................... 458 ç suspended.................................... 442 : Switch o lights............................ 411 : Switch on headlamps.................... 411 6 Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling............................................... 421 6 Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop.................................. 421 á temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted....................................... 450

¸ temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty....................................................... 449 Ú Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.............. 464 + Top up coolant See Owner's Manual.................................................. 428 ¥ Top up washer uid....................... 427 u Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual............................................ 416 d Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care................................................ 433 ! Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake................................... 439 Ú .................................................... 464 d Vehicle is operational Switch o ignition before exiting............................. 422 h Warning tyre defect....................... 461 h Wheel sensor(s) missing................ 460

Ú XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss...................................................... 465 "Electric" drive program currently unavailable............................................. 418 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 447 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 447 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual.................................................. 448 Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual............................................ 425 Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual......... 455 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.............................. 456 Active Distance Assist available again..... 444 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 443

Index 495
Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 443 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 448 Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 448 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops........................................... 445 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 445 Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 445 Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 411 Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 412 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 412 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative................................................... 412 Anti-the alarm system Malfunction....... 427 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position........................................................ 431

496 Index
Apply brake to select D or R................... 431 Apply brake to select R.......................... 431 Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)........................................ 435 Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message).................................... 435 Beginning emergency stop..................... 445 Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. 446 Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 447 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 447 Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual.................................................. 428 Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual................. 417 Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method............................................ 417

Check brake pads See Owner's Manual......................................................... 440 Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator......................................... 463 Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away until the warning goes out...................... 434 Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 441 Cruise control inoperative...................... 441 Cruise control o ................................... 442 Depress clutch fully to start engine........ 434 Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual.................. 457 Drive system Malfunction Stop Switch engine o .............................................. 430 Drive system Malfunction Visit workshop...................................................... 430 Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual..................................... 405 Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual..................................... 406

Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning.... 413 Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. 423 Head-up display inoperative................... 424 Limiter inoperative................................. 442 Limiter passive....................................... 442 N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling.................................................... 432 Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual.............................. 416 Only electric drive available Power limited................................................... 417 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary.............................................. 431 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual................... 451 Parking lock inoperative Apply the parking brake......................................... 433 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.............................. 409

PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual.................................................. 407 Reduce speed........................................ 462 Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual.............................. 418 Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 432 Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual........ 434 Risk of vehicle rolling away Parking brake not applied See Owner's Manual... 439 Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P.............. 432 Run Flat Indicator inoperative................. 463 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 444 Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........................ 444 Speed Limit Assist inoperative................ 444 Teaching in transmission complete......... 434

Index 497

Teaching in transmission Operate selector lever Brake for XX seconds Risk of vehicle rolling............................. 433 To shi out of P or N, depress brake and start engine..................................... 431 To switch o the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times...................................... 428 Tra c Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........................ 446 Tra c Sign Assist inoperative................. 446 Transmission Malfunction....................... 433 Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 432 Transmission Malfunction Visit workshop...................................................... 434 Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable......................................................... 459 Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 459 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors........................................ 460

Tyre pressure Check tyres...................... 462
Tyre(s) overheated.................................. 462
Vehicle not currently being charged
Charging station fault............................. 417
Wiper malfunctioning............................. 427
Without changing gear, consult work-
shop.............................................. 419, 432
Without starting engine again, consult
workshop............................................... 419
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Additional door lock................................. 85 Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 79 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 89 Opening (from inside)............................... 86 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 86
Door control panel......................................... 18
Drawbar see Tow-bar system

498 Index

Drive Away Assist......................................... 263
Drive position Engaging................................................ 179
Drive program display.................................. 173
Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat see Seat
Driving abroad Light adjustment (low beam).................. 130
Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 215 Active Brake Assist................................. 235 Adaptive brake lights.............................. 220 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 216 Cameras................................................ 214 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 218 ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 217 ESP® trailer stabilisation........................ 217 Overview................................................ 214 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 214 Responsibility......................................... 213 STEER CONTROL................................... 218

Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment............................................ 248
Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Speed Limit Assist see Start-o assist see Tra c Sign Assist

Driving tips Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... 130 General driving tips................................ 163 Running-in notes.................................... 162
Driving tips see Recuperation
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT Adaptive damping adjustment................ 248 Calling up the fuel consumption indicator...................................................... 175 Con guring drive program I.................... 174 Displaying engine data........................... 175 Displaying vehicle data........................... 175 Drive program display............................ 173 Drive programs...................................... 172 Function................................................ 172 Operating.............................................. 173 Selects the drive program...................... 173

Index 499

E
E10.............................................................. 389
Easy entry feature Function/notes...................................... 115 Setting................................................... 116
Easy exit feature Function/notes...................................... 115 Setting................................................... 116
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Function/notes...................................... 218
ECO Assist Function/notes...................................... 170
ECO display Function................................................ 168
ECO start/stop function Switching o /on.................................... 167
Electric drive................................................ 156
Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 209 Applying/releasing manually.................. 211 Emergency braking................................ 212 Releasing automatically.......................... 211

Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity......................... 29
Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency Assistance overview................................. 20 Fire extinguisher.................................... 344 First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 344 Removing the warning triangle............... 343 Safety vest............................................. 343 Setting up the warning triangle............... 344
Emergency braking...................................... 212
Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency key Inserting/removing.................................. 84 Locking/unlocking the doors................... 89
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 160

Emergency shuto see Hybrid system
Emergency spare wheel In ating................................................. 381 Notes..................................................... 380
Energy ow display Displaying.............................................. 293 Function/notes...................................... 293
Engine Engine number....................................... 386 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 160 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 162
Engine data Displaying.............................................. 175
Engine electronics Notes..................................................... 383
Engine number............................................. 386
Engine oil Additives................................................ 393 Capacity................................................ 394 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... 331 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. 394 Quality................................................... 394

500 Index

Topping up............................................. 331
ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending..................................... 319
Error message see Display message
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP® Crosswind Assist.................................... 217 Trailer stabilisation................................. 217
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating.......................... 218 Function/notes...................................... 216
EU type approval number............................. 386
Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 339
Exterior lighting see Lights
F
Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

Fire extinguisher.......................................... 344
First-aid kit (so sided)................................. 344
Flat towing see Tow-bar system
Flat tyre MOExtended tyres................................. 345 Notes..................................................... 345 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 347 Wheel change........................................ 375
Floor mats................................................... 129
Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 214
Free so ware................................................. 45
Frequencies Mobile phone......................................... 384 Two-way radio........................................ 384
Front airbag (driver, front passenger).............. 53
Front passenger seat see Seat
Front wheel arch Fitting/removing the cover..................... 140

Front wheel arch cover Fitting/removing.................................... 140
Fuel Additives................................................ 390 Diesel.................................................... 390 E10........................................................ 389 Fuel reserve........................................... 391 Low outside temperatures...................... 390 Petrol..................................................... 389 Quality (diesel)....................................... 390 Quality (petrol)....................................... 389 Refuelling............................................... 182 Sulphur content..................................... 389 Tank content.......................................... 391
Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 175
Function seat see Door control panel
Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 362 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 362 Fuse box in the boot............................... 364 Fuse box in the engine compartment...... 363

Index 501

Fuse box in the front passenger footwell........................................................ 363 Notes..................................................... 362
G
Garage door opener Clearing the memory.............................. 209
Garage door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 209 Programming buttons............................. 207 Resolving problems................................ 208 Synchronising the rolling code................ 208
Gearshi recommendation................... 177, 180 Genuine parts................................................ 25 Glide mode.................................................. 181 Gross mass.................................................. 386
H
Handbrake see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual)................ 365 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 92

Hazard warning lights................................... 133
Head restraint Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 110 Rear (adjusting)...................................... 111 Rear (removing/ tting)........................... 112
Head-up display Adjusting brightness (on-board computer).................................................... 277 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 277 Care...................................................... 340 Function................................................ 276 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 277 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Setting the position (on-board computer).................................................... 277 Switching on/o .................................... 278
Headlamp ashing........................................ 132
Headlamps see Automatic driving lights
Heating see Climate control
Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

High beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 132
High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
High-pressure cleaner (care)........................ 336
High-voltage battery Charge level display............................... 205 Charging cable control panel.................. 194 Charging duration.................................. 397 Connection types................................... 397 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 200 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 204 Energy ow display................................. 293 General notes on charging..................... 188 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195 Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3)................................................. 191 Notes on charging (fast charging station, mode 4)......................................... 193 Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2)................................................. 190 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 191

502 Index

Range.................................................... 397 Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... 193 Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3)..................... 197 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 201 Stowing the charging cable.................... 188 Type....................................................... 397 Voltage types......................................... 397
High-voltage on-board electrical system Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195
Hill Start Assist............................................ 220
HOLD function Function/notes...................................... 219 Switching on/o .................................... 219
Home screen (media display) Overview................................................ 280
Hybrid system Con guring settings via the multimedia system............................................. 292 Manual switch-o ................................... 157
Hybrid system see Battery operation

see Electric drive
I
i-Size child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 70 Seats suitable for attaching...................... 70
Identi cation plate Engine................................................... 386 Vehicle.................................................. 386
Ignition key see Key
Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 152
Immobiliser.................................................. 101
Implied warranty Vehicle..................................................... 41
Importer addresses Wireless components............................... 36
In-Car O ce Features................................................ 311
Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp
Individual drive program Con guring............................................ 174

Selecting............................................... 173
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster Function/notes.............................. 271, 272
Instrument display Function/notes...................................... 272 Instrument cluster.................................... 12 Overview of displays............................... 276 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 469
Instrument display and on-board computer
Function/notes...................................... 271
Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating.......................... 134 Active headlamps................................... 133 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 135 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 136 City lighting............................................ 134 Cornering light....................................... 134 Motorway mode..................................... 134 Overview................................................ 133
Intelligent operating-mode strategy see Route-based operating-mode strategy

Index 503

Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 138 Ambient lighting..................................... 138 Reading lamp......................................... 138 Switch-o delay time.............................. 139
Interior protection Function................................................ 103 Priming/deactivating............................. 103
Internet radio see TuneIn
iPhone® see Smartphone integration
ISOFIX child seat anchor Seats suitable for attaching...................... 68
ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 70
J
Jack Declaration of conformity......................... 36 Storage location..................................... 374
Jump-start connection General notes........................................ 352

K
Key Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 83 Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control.......................................... 150 Battery..................................................... 84 Deactivating a function............................ 83 Emergency key......................................... 84 Energy consumption................................ 83 Function overview.................................... 82 Key ring attachment................................. 84 Problem................................................... 85 Unlocking setting..................................... 83
KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 83 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 87 Problem................................................... 88 Unlocking setting..................................... 83
Kickdown Using..................................................... 180
Knee airbag.................................................... 53

L
Lamp see Interior lighting
Lamp (instrument display) see Warning/indicator lamp
Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language Notes..................................................... 291 Setting................................................... 291
Light adjustment Low beam (driving abroad)..................... 130
Light switch Overview................................................ 130
Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights
Lights Active headlamps................................... 133 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 135 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 136

504 Index

Automatic driving lights.......................... 131 Changing bulbs...................................... 139 City lighting............................................ 134 Combination switch............................... 132 Cornering light....................................... 134 Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... 130 Hazard warning lights............................. 133 Headlamp ashing................................. 132 Headlamp range..................................... 131 High beam............................................. 132 Intelligent Light System.......................... 133 Light switch........................................... 130 Low beam.............................................. 130 Motorway mode..................................... 134 Parking lights......................................... 130 Rear fog light......................................... 130 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 130 Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. 137 Standing lights....................................... 130 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... 134 Switching the surround lighting on/o ... 138 Turn signal indicator............................... 132

Limiter Activating............................................... 224 Buttons.................................................. 224 Calling up a speed................................. 224 Deactivating........................................... 224 Function................................................ 223 Maximum design speed.......................... 172 Passive mode......................................... 223 Permanent setting.................................. 226 Requirements........................................ 224 Selecting............................................... 224 Setting a speed...................................... 224 Storing a speed.............................. 224, 228 Switching o /deactivating..................... 228 Switching on/activating......................... 228 System limits......................................... 223
Limiting speed see Limiter
LINGUATRONIC Function................................................ 283 Starting................................................. 283
Live Tra c Information Switching the tra c information display on................................................... 299

Loading Notes..................................................... 118 Roof luggage rack.................................. 123 Tie-down eyes........................................ 123
Loading guidelines....................................... 118
Loads Fixing..................................................... 118
Locking/unlocking Additional door lock................................. 85 Emergency key......................................... 89 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 87 Switching the automatic locking feature on/o .............................................. 88 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 86
Low beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 130 Light adjustment (driving abroad)........... 130
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Securing................................................ 118
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Index 505

Lumbar support (4-way)............................... 110
M
Main beam Changing bulbs...................................... 141
Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 47
Manoeuvring aid see Manoeuvring assistance
Manoeuvring assistance Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 264 Drive Away Assist................................... 263
Manoeuvring assistant Activating/deactivating.......................... 264
Manual transmission Operating the gearshi lever.................. 175
Map Displaying online map contents.............. 299 Displaying weather information.............. 299 Moving................................................... 298 Selecting the map orientation................ 298

Setting the map scale............................ 298 Switching motorway information on/o ................................................... 298
Massage programmes Resetting the settings............................ 112 Selecting the front seats........................ 112
Maximum design speed................................ 172
Maximum design speed see Limiter
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight... 386
MBUX Interior Assistant Overview................................................ 284 Switching the reading light on/o (contactless).......................................... 285 Switching the search light on/o (contactless).......................................... 285
MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode... 213 Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 212 Con guring drive program I.................... 174 Home screen......................................... 280 Notes..................................................... 279 Operating the touchscreen..................... 281 Overview................................................ 279

Restoring (factory settings).................... 292 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 232 Setting the air distribution...................... 149 Setting the stationary heater/ventilation........................................................ 154 Standby mode function.......................... 212
MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant
Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 321
Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment...................................................... 322
Medical aids................................................... 40
Memory function Function................................................ 116 Head-up display -- Calling up stored settings.................................................. 117 Head-up display -- Storing settings......... 117 Operating.............................................. 117 Outside mirrors -- Calling up stored settings.................................................. 117 Outside mirrors -- Storing settings.......... 117

506 Index

Seat -- Calling up stored settings............ 117 Seat -- Storing settings........................... 117
Menu (on-board computer) Head-up display..................................... 277 Overview................................................ 273
Mercedes me app Information............................................ 311 Notes....................................................... 26 on-demand feature................................... 26
Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 307 Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.................................................... 306 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 307 Consenting to data transfer.................... 308 Information............................................ 306 Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... 305 Transferred data..................................... 308
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... 310 Information............................................ 309

Transferred data..................................... 311
Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 156
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 316 Information............................................ 314 Information about data transfer...... 317, 319 Manual emergency call.......................... 317 Overview................................................ 316 Self-diagnosis........................................ 319 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode..................................................... 319
Mercedes-Benz service centre see Quali ed specialist workshop
Message (instrument display) see Display message
Message memory......................................... 402
Mirrors see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone Frequencies........................................... 384 Notes on wireless charging.................... 126 Transmission output (maximum)............. 384

Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate
MOExtended tyres........................................ 345
Motorway mode........................................... 134
MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... 133
Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons............................... 273
Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel
Multimedia system see MBUX multimedia system
N
Navigation Activating............................................... 294 Notes..................................................... 293 Overview................................................ 295 Showing/hiding the menu...................... 294
Navigation see Destination entry

Index 507

see Map see Route
Neutral Engaging................................................ 178
Noise Wheels and tyres................................... 365 Wheels/tyres......................................... 365
O
Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic measures a er an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt
Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer Displaying the service due date.............. 327 Head-up display menu............................ 277 Instrument display................................. 276 Menu overview....................................... 273 Operating.............................................. 273
On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection
On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Charging................................................ 354 Replacing............................................... 355 Starting assistance................................ 354
On-board electronics Engine electronics................................. 383 Notes..................................................... 383 Two-way radios...................................... 383
on-demand feature Activating................................................. 26 Notes....................................................... 26
Online services Data storage............................................ 44
Online services see In-Car O ce
Open-source so ware.................................... 45

Opening the boot lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 92
Operating uids AdBlue®................................................. 392 Additives (fuel)....................................... 390 Brake uid............................................. 395 Coolant (engine).................................... 395 Engine oil............................................... 393 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 390 Fuel (petrol)........................................... 389 Notes..................................................... 387 windscreen washer uid......................... 396
Operating safety Declaration of conformity (electromagnetic compatibility)............................ 29 Declaration of conformity (jack)............... 36 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit)...... 37 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 29 Information.............................................. 27
Operating system see On-board computer
Output see Power meter

508 Index

Outside mirrors Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 145 Automatic mirror folding function........... 146 Folding in/out........................................ 144 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Parking position..................................... 145 Setting................................................... 144
Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 16
Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 26
Owner's Manual (digital)................................. 22
P
Paint (cleaning instructions)......................... 337
Paint code................................................... 386
Panorama sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof
Park position Engaging................................................ 178 Selecting automatically.......................... 178
Parking see Electric parking brake

Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating............................................... 258 Adjusting warning tones......................... 258 Deactivating........................................... 258 Function................................................ 255 Side impact protection........................... 256 System limitations.................................. 255
Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking lights............................................... 130
Parking option Selecting............................................... 299
Parking position Outside mirrors...................................... 145 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........... 146
Parking service Selecting parking options....................... 299
Parking up................................................... 212

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto
Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode... 213 Standby mode function.......................... 212
Permissible axle load.................................... 386
Permissible towing methods................. 356, 357
Petrol........................................................... 389
Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 81
Plastic trim (Care)........................................ 340
Plug-in hybrid operation Charging cable control panel.................. 194 Charging the high-voltage battery at a charging station (mode 3)...................... 191 Charging the high-voltage battery at a mains socket (mode 2)........................... 190 Charging the high-voltage battery at a rapid charging station (mode 4).............. 193 Charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox (mode 3).................................... 191

Index 509

Con guring settings via the multimedia system............................................. 292 Displaying the power meter.................... 276 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 200 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 204 Energy ow display................................. 293 Manual switch-o of the hybrid system... 157 Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... 188 Notes on plug-in hybrid operation........... 156 Power availability display........................ 275 Power meter.......................................... 275 Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 171 Setting the maximum possible charging current............................................. 193 Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3)..................... 197 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 201 Stowing the charging cable.................... 188
Post-collision brake........................................ 61
Power availability display Function/notes...................................... 275

Power display see Power availability display
Power meter Function/notes...................................... 275
Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 159
Pre-entry climate control (immediate)........... 152
Pre-entry climate control at departure time
Function................................................ 150 Setting................................................... 151
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Activating/deactivating.......................... 151
Pre-entry climate control using the key Function................................................ 150 Setting................................................... 150
Pre-entry climate control via the key Activating/deactivating.......................... 150
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Function.................................................. 60 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 60 Reversing measures................................. 60

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Function.................................................. 60 Reversing measures................................. 60
Preventative occupant protection system see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Pro le Creating a new pro le............................ 287 Notes..................................................... 286 Selecting pro le options......................... 287
Programme see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protection of the environment Notes....................................................... 24 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 24
Q
QR code Rescue card............................................. 41
Quali ed specialist workshop......................... 39

510 Index

R
Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage................................................. 214
Radio Overview of the functions and symbols... 323
Rain closing function Side windows........................................... 95
Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof......................................... 99
REACH regulation........................................... 40
Reading lamp see Interior lighting
Reading light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 285
Real wood (Care).......................................... 340
Rear door (child safety lock)........................... 79
Rear fog light Switching on/o .................................... 131
Rear seat see Seat
Rear seat belt Status display.......................................... 52

Rear seat belt status display........................... 52
Rear window heater...................................... 147
Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 145
Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors
Recuperation Function................................................ 168 Setting................................................... 169
Recycling see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Reducing agent see AdBlue®
Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle............................. 182
Registration Vehicle..................................................... 40
Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia............................................... 385 Small components................................. 385
Remote Online Charging the starter battery................... 161 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 161

Starting the vehicle................................ 162
Replacing a bulb see Changing bulbs
Rescue card................................................... 41
Reserve Fuel....................................................... 391
Reset function (MBUX multimedia system).... 292
Residual heat............................................... 149
Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)
Restraint system Basic instructions for children.................. 61 Function in an accident............................ 47 Functionality............................................ 47 Limited protection.................................... 46 Malfunction............................................. 47 Protection................................................ 46 Self-test................................................... 47 Warning lamp........................................... 47
Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 178
Reversing camera Care...................................................... 339

Index 511

Function................................................ 249 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera)................................................ 254 Switching automatic operation on/o (360° Camera)...................................... 254
Reversing lights (changing bulbs).................. 141
Rims (care).................................................. 339
Roll away protection see HOLD function
Roller sunblind Sliding sunroof......................................... 97
Roof lining (care).......................................... 340
Roof load..................................................... 397
Roof luggage rack Loading.................................................. 123 Securing................................................ 123
Route Calculating............................................. 297 Selecting options................................... 297
Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 297 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 297

Route-based operating-mode strategy Function/notes...................................... 171
Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 231 Setting................................................... 232
Run- at characteristics MOExtended tyres................................. 345
Running-in notes.......................................... 162
S
Safety systems see Driving safety system
Safety vest................................................... 343
Search light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 285
Seat 4-way lumbar support............................ 110 adjusting (electrically)............................ 110 Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 107 Adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package)................................................ 105 Con guring settings............................... 112 Correct driver's seat position................. 104

Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 122 Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 120 Locking the backrest (rear).................... 122 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Resetting the settings............................ 112 Setting options......................................... 18
Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 52 Care...................................................... 340 Fastening................................................. 51 Protection................................................ 48 Rear seat belt status display..................... 52 Reduced protection.................................. 49 Releasing................................................. 52 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 51 Warning lamp........................................... 52
Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 52 Function.................................................. 51
Seat belt tensioners Activation................................................ 47
Seat belt warning see Seat belt

512 Index

Seat cover (Care)......................................... 340
Seat heating Activating/deactivating.......................... 113
Seat ventilation Switching on/o .................................... 113
Selecting a gear see Changing gears
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 57
Sensors (care)............................................. 339
Service see ASSYST PLUS
Service centre see Quali ed specialist workshop
Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed............................................ 172
Setting a speed see Cruise control

Setting the map scale see Map
Shi paddles see Steering wheel gearshi paddles
Shi ing gears Gearshi recommendation............. 177, 180
Side airbag..................................................... 53
Side impact protection................................. 256
Side windows Automatic function................................... 95 Child safety lock in the rear...................... 81 Closing using the key............................... 96 Convenience closing................................ 96 Convenience opening............................... 95 Opening with the key................................ 95 Opening/closing...................................... 94 Problem................................................... 96 Rain closing function................................ 95
Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................. 99 Closing.................................................... 97 Closing using the key............................... 96 Opening................................................... 97 Opening with the key................................ 95

Problem................................................. 100 Rain-closing feature................................. 99
Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Smartphone integration Overview................................................ 313
Snow chains................................................ 365
Socket (12 V) Boot/luggage compartment................... 125 Front centre console.............................. 125
Socket (115 V) Rear....................................................... 125
So ware update System updates..................................... 288
Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 60
Sound menu Functions overview................................ 326
Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Specialist workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop

Index 513

Speci c absorption rate................................. 29
Speed Limit Assist Function/notes...................................... 240 Setting................................................... 241 System limitations.................................. 240
Speed limit for winter tyres Setting................................................... 226
Standby mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 213 Function................................................ 212
Standing lights............................................. 130
Start-o assist Activating............................................... 221 Function................................................ 221
Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................. 205 Starting the vehicle................................ 160 Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 159
Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function
Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... 161

Starting see Vehicle
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting-o aid see Hill Start Assist
Stationary heater/ventilation Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 153 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 154
STEER CONTROL Function/notes...................................... 218
Steering wheel Adjusting (manually)............................... 114 Buttons.................................................. 273 Care...................................................... 340 Steering wheel heater............................ 115
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.................. 179
Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating.......................... 115
Stowage areas see Loading see Stowage space

Stowage compartments see Loading see Stowage space
Stowage space Armrest................................................. 120 Centre console...................................... 120 Door...................................................... 120 Glove compartment............................... 120
Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 297
Suggestions Con guring............................................ 287
Sulphur content........................................... 389
Surround lighting Switching on/o .................................... 138
Surround View see 360° Camera
Suspension Adaptive damping adjustment................ 248 Damping characteristics......................... 248
SVHC (substances of very high concern)........ 40
Switch-o delay time Exterior.................................................. 137

514 Index

Interior................................................... 139
Synchronisation function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 149 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 149
System settings Overview of the system settings menu.... 288 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)....................................................... 292
System settings see Language
T
Tailpipes (care)............................................. 339
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Protection of the environment.................. 24
Tank content AdBlue®................................................. 393 Fuel....................................................... 391 Reserve (fuel)......................................... 391
Technical data Axle load (trailer operation).................... 401 Component-speci c information............ 385

Fastening points (trailer hitch)................ 399 Information............................................ 383 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch)........ 399 Notes (trailer hitch)................................ 399 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch).......... 399 Regulatory radio identi cation (Indonesia).................................................... 385 Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. 385 Tongue weight........................................ 400 Towing capacity (trailer operation).......... 399
Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 305 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 305 Functions in the telephone menu............ 305 Notes..................................................... 302 Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... 126 Operating modes................................... 304 Telephone menu overview...................... 304 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... 128
Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® telephony............................. 304

Temperature Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... 147
Themes Fastening............................................... 287
Through-loading feature see Seat
Tie-down eyes.............................................. 123
TIREFIT kit Declaration of conformity......................... 37 Storage location..................................... 346 Using..................................................... 347
To switch on the ignition see Vehicle
Tongue weight.............................................. 400
Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether...................................................... 72
Topping up Topping up AdBlue®............................... 186
Touch Control On-board computer................................ 273 Operating.............................................. 281

Index 515

Touchpad Operating.............................................. 281
Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 281
Tow-away protection Function................................................ 102 Priming/deactivating............................. 102
Tow-bar system............................................ 270
Tow-starting................................................. 361
Towing away................................................. 358
Towing eye Fitting.................................................... 361 Storage location..................................... 361
Towing methods................................... 356, 357
Tra c information Switching on the display......................... 299
Tra c Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 241 Setting................................................... 243 System limits......................................... 241
Trailer hitch Axle load................................................ 401 Bicycle rack........................................... 268

Care...................................................... 339 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 266 Fastening points.................................... 399 Folding the ball neck out/in................... 265 General notes........................................ 399 Mounting dimensions............................. 399 Notes..................................................... 264 Overhang dimension.............................. 399 Socket................................................... 266 Tongue weight........................................ 400 Towing capacity..................................... 399
Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 245 Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 246 Bicycle rack........................................... 268 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 266 Folding the ball neck out/in................... 265 Notes..................................................... 264 Socket................................................... 266
Trailer stabilisation Function/notes...................................... 217
Transmission Engaging neutral.................................... 178
Transmission (problem)................................ 179

Transmission position display....................... 177
Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 359
Trim element (Care)...................................... 340
TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 325
Turn signal indicator Activating/deactivating.......................... 132
Turn signal lights Changing bulbs (rear)............................. 141
Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 384 Notes on installation.............................. 383 Transmission output (maximum)............. 384
Type approval number (EU)........................... 386
Tyre in ation compressor see TIREFIT kit
Tyre pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. 368 Notes..................................................... 366 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... 370

516 Index
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 369 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 347 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 369 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 368 Tyre pressure table................................. 367
Tyre pressure loss warning system Function................................................ 369 Restarting.............................................. 370
Tyre pressure monitoring system Checking the tyre pressures................... 368 Function................................................ 368 Restarting.............................................. 369
Tyre pressure table....................................... 367
Tyre temperature Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 368
Tyre tread.................................................... 365
Tyre-change tool kit Overview................................................ 374
Tyres Checking............................................... 365

Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 368 Fitting.................................................... 379 Flat tyre................................................. 345 Interchanging......................................... 373 MOExtended tyres................................. 345 Noise..................................................... 365 Notes on tting...................................... 370 Removing............................................... 378 Replacing....................................... 370, 375 Replacing the wheel trim........................ 375 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... 370 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 369 Selection............................................... 370 Snow chains.......................................... 365 Storing................................................... 374 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 347 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 366 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 369 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 368 Tyre pressure table................................. 367 Unusual handling characteristics............ 365

U
Unlocking see Locking/unlocking
Updates Important system updates...................... 288
USB port Front stowage compartment.................. 120 Rear....................................................... 126
V
Vehicle Activating/deactivating standby mode... 213 Additional door lock................................. 85 Correct use.............................................. 40 Data acquisition....................................... 42 Data storage............................................ 42 Diagnostics connection............................ 38 Equipment............................................... 26 Implied warranty...................................... 41 Locking (automatically)............................ 88 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 89 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 86 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 87 Lowering................................................ 379

Index 517

Medical aids............................................ 40 Parking up............................................. 212 QR code rescue card............................... 41 Quali ed specialist workshop................... 39 Raising................................................... 376 REACH regulation.................................... 40 Registration............................................. 40 Setting collision detection (parked vehicle).................................................. 212 Standby mode function.......................... 212 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 160 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 162 Starting (start/stop button)................... 160 SVHC (substances of very high concern).. 40 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 205 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 159 Towing................................................... 270 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 95
Vehicle battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
Vehicle camera Information............................................ 214
Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 175 Roof load............................................... 397

Vehicle height........................................ 397 Vehicle length........................................ 397 Vehicle width......................................... 397 Wheelbase............................................. 397
Vehicle dimensions...................................... 397
Vehicle emergency start............................... 361
Vehicle identi cation number see VIN
Vehicle identi cation plate EU type approval number....................... 386 Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 386 Paint code............................................. 386 Permissible axle load.............................. 386 VIN........................................................ 386
Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)........ 161
Vehicle key see Key
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 214

Vehicle socket Care...................................................... 339 Indicator lamps...................................... 195
Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 346 Towing eye............................................. 361
Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 95
Ventilation see Climate control
Vents see Air vents
VIN Engine compartment.............................. 386 Identi cation plate................................. 386 Windscreen............................................ 386
Vision Demisting windows................................ 149
W
Warning lamp see Warning/indicator lamp

518 Index
Warning system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
Warning triangle Removing............................................... 343 Setting up.............................................. 344
Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... 481 Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. 480 J Brake system warning lamp (red)... 479 J Brake system warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... 478 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red)........... 474 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)....... 476 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red).............................................. 478 # Electrical fault warning lamp ...................................................... 473, 477 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp...... 476 å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ 482 ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... 481

÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 482 æ Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 477 Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 473 _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 472 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 470 ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 471 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 472 Ú System error warning lamp........... 472 ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp................................. 478 ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp....... 474 h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes....................... 483 h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up.................... 484 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 480 Overview................................................ 469

PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 57
Warranty........................................................ 41
Washing by hand (care)................................ 337
Water tank see Air-water duct
Weather information..................................... 299
Web browsers Overview................................................ 312
Wheel change Fitting a new wheel................................ 379 Lowering the vehicle.............................. 379 Preparation............................................ 375 Raising the vehicle................................. 376 Removing a wheel.................................. 378 Removing/ tting hub caps..................... 375
Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel
Wheel rotation............................................. 373
Wheels Care...................................................... 339 Checking............................................... 365 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 368

Index 519

Fitting.................................................... 379 Flat tyre................................................. 345 Interchanging......................................... 373 MOExtended tyres................................. 345 Noise..................................................... 365 Notes on tting...................................... 370 Removing............................................... 378 Replacing....................................... 370, 375 Replacing the hub cap............................ 375 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... 370 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 369 Selection............................................... 370 Snow chains.......................................... 365 Storing................................................... 374 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 347 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 366 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 369 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 368 Tyre pressure table................................. 367 Unusual handling characteristics............ 365

Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 289
Widescreen cockpit instrument display Instrument cluster.................................... 14
Window airbag............................................... 53
Window li er see Side windows
Windows Care...................................................... 339
Windows see Side windows
Windscreen Demisting.............................................. 147 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 142
Windscreen see Windscreen
windscreen washer uid Notes..................................................... 396
Windscreen washer system Topping up............................................. 333
Windscreen wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 141 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 142

Wing see Front wheel arch
Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 365
Winter tyres Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 226
Wiper blades Care...................................................... 339 Replacing (windscreen).......................... 142
Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 126 Mobile phone......................................... 128
Wireless components Importer addresses.................................. 36
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity......................... 29 Speci c absorption rate........................... 29
Workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop



References

OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S) AH XSL Formatter V6.4 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.4.3.27525 (2017/01/23 10:11JST)